2013 Captiva

Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/12/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-20
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-36 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-41 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-31
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-45
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2013 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Vehicle Data Recording and
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Additional Maintenance OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12 OnStar Additional
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase and Operating and specifically

documentation relating to your Driver Behavior on page 92,
specific vehicle to confirm each of Driving Environment on page 92,
the features found on your vehicle. and Vehicle Design on page 92.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference. Danger, Warnings, and
The names, logos, emblems, Cautions
slogans, vehicle model names, and Using this Manual Warning messages found on vehicle
vehicle body designs appearing in To quickly locate information about labels and in this manual describe
this manual including, but not limited the vehicle, use the Index in the hazards and what to do to avoid or
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, back of the manual. It is an reduce them.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
alphabetical list of what is in the Danger indicates a hazard with a
CAPTIVA are trademarks and/or manual and the page number where
service marks of General Motors high level of risk which will result in
it can be found. serious injury or death.
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors. Warning or Caution indicates a
About Driving the Vehicle
This manual describes features that hazard that could result in injury or
may or may not be on your specific As with other vehicles of this type, death.
vehicle either because they are failure to operate this vehicle
options that you did not purchase or correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to
{ WARNING
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual. read the driving guidelines in this These mean there is something
manual in the section called Driving that could hurt you or other
people.
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 22738461 B Second Printing I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Notice: This means there is M : This symbol is shown when I : Cruise Control
something that could result in you need to see your owner manual
property or vehicle damage. This for additional instructions or
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
would not be covered by the information. O : Exterior Lamps
vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when # : Fog Lamps
you need to see a service manual . : Fuel Gauge
for additional instructions or
information. + : Fuses
Vehicle Symbol Chart 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle j : LATCH System Child
A circle with a slash through it is a and what they mean. For more Restraints
safety symbol which means Do information on the symbol, refer to * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Not, Do not do this, or Do not let the Index.
this happen. : : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light } : Power
Symbols # : Air Conditioning / : Remote Vehicle Start
The vehicle has components and ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) > : Safety Belt Reminders
labels that use symbols instead of v +/-: Audio Steering Wheel
text. Symbols are shown along with Controls
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
the text describing the operation or
$ : Brake System Warning Light d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
information relating to a specific
component, control, message, " : Charging System M : Windshield Washer Fluid
gauge, or indicator.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Passenger Sensing System Rear Vision

(United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18
Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Performance and Maintenance
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 Traction Control
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Head Restraint Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 88. 10. Instrument Panel Storage on 20. Climate Control Systems on
2. Instrument Panel Illumination page 41. page 81 (If Equipped).
Control on page 64. 11. Data Link Connector (DLC) Automatic Climate Control
3. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. (Out of View). See Malfunction System on page 84 (If
See Turn and Lane-Change Indicator Lamp on page 514. Equipped).
Signals on page 63. 12. Hood Release. See Hood on 21. Hazard Warning Flashers on
4. Instrument Cluster on page 59. page 103. page 63.
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on 13. Cruise Control on page 929. 22. Passenger Airbag Status
page 53. 14. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Indicator. See Passenger
page 52. Sensing System (United
6. AM-FM Radio on page 75. States) on page 325.
7. Auxiliary Input Jack. See 15. Horn on page 53.
23. Passenger Safety Belt
Auxiliary Devices on page 719. 16. Steering Wheel Controls on Reminder. See Safety Belt
8. Fog Lamps on page 64. page 52 (If Equipped). Reminders on page 511.
Exterior Lamp Controls on 17. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 61. page 54.
9. Driver Information Center (DIC) 18. Traction Control System (TCS)

Buttons. See Driver Information on page 927.
Center (DIC) on page 523. 19. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 920.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive See Keys on page 21 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 22.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may This vehicle may have a remote
not be on your specific vehicle. starting feature that starts the
For more detailed information, refer engine from outside of the vehicle.
to each of the features which can be Starting the Engine Using
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry Without Remote Start Shown, with
To start the vehicle:
(RKE) System Remote Start Similar 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
The RKE transmitter functions work Q: Press to lock all the doors,
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the including the liftgate. 2. Press and release Q on the
vehicle. K : Press once to unlock the driver RKE transmitter.
door. If K is pressed again within 3. Immediately after completing
five seconds, all remaining doors Step 2, press and hold / until
unlock. the parking lamps flash. If the
L : Press and release to locate vehicle's lights can not be seen,
the vehicle. Press and hold L to press and hold / for at least
four seconds.
activate the panic alarm. Press L
again to turn off the alarm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking

. Turn the ignition switch on and
lamps will turn on and remain on as then off.
long as the engine is running. The See Remote Vehicle Start on
doors will be locked and the climate page 24.
control system will operate at the
same setting as when the vehicle Door Locks
was last turned off.
From the outside, lock or unlock the
After entering the vehicle during a door using the key or the Remote
remote start, insert and turn the key Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
to the ON/RUN position to drive the See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
vehicle. System Operation on page 22.
If the vehicle is left running, it From the inside, push or pull the
automatically shuts off after Open the rear doors to access the
manual door lock on each door. security locks on the inside edge of
10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done. Use the power door lock switch on each door.
the front doors. To activate, insert a key into the slot
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start Q: Press to lock the doors. and turn it to the horizontal position.
The door can only be opened from
To manually shut off a remote start:
K: Press to unlock the doors.
the outside.
See Door Locks on page 26 and
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the To return the door to normal
Power Door Locks on page 26.
vehicle and press / until the operation, open the door and turn
parking lamps turn off. Safety Locks the slot to the vertical position.
. Turn on the hazard warning The vehicle has rear door security
flashers. locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
inside.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

To lock or unlock the liftgate from The driver window switch has an
outside the vehicle, press Q or K express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
twice on the Remote Keyless
switch. Press the switch part way
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
and the window will open a small
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
amount. Press the switch down all
System Operation on page 22.
the way and release it and the
To lock or unlock the liftgate from window lowers all the way.
inside the vehicle, press Q or K on To stop the window while it is
the power door lock switch. lowering, press and release the
To open the liftgate, press the touch switch.
pad on the underside of the liftgate See Power Windows on page 214.
handle and pull up.
Press the front of the switch to open Window Lockout
To close the liftgate, pull down using the window. Pull the switch up to
the handle and close until it latches. close it. This feature prevents the rear seat
passengers from operating the
See Liftgate on page 28. The power windows operate when windows. Press the lockout switch
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ on the driver door panel to activate
ACCESSORY, or while in Retained the switch. Press it again to
Accessory Power (RAP). See deactivate the switch.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 917.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

Manual Seats
To adjust a manual seat:
If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

down to raise or lower the seat. forward or rearward to adjust the
See Seat Adjustment on page 33. seat position.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-8 In Brief
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
front or rear of the control up If available, move the lever forward
or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. To recline the seatback:
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 34. See Lumbar Adjustment on 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
page 34. side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-9
To return the seatback to the upright To adjust a power seatback, Heated Seats
position: if equipped:
1. Lift the lever fully without . Tilt the top of the control
applying pressure to the rearward to recline.
seatback, and the seatback will . Tilt the top of the control forward
return to the upright position. to raise.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to See Reclining Seatbacks on
make sure it is locked. page 35.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Second Row Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded
down to increase cargo space.
See Rear Seats on page 38. Automatic Climate Control System
Shown
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel. To operate,
the ignition must be on.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-10 In Brief
Press the button once for the Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
System (United States)
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate two for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 36.
The passenger sensing system will
Head Restraint turn off the right front passenger
Adjustment frontal airbag under certain
Do not drive until the head restraints conditions. The driver airbag,
for all occupants are installed and seat-mounted side impact airbags,
Refer to the following sections for and roof-rail airbags are not affected
adjusted properly.
important information on how to use by the passenger sensing system.
To achieve a comfortable seating safety belts properly:
position, change the seatback The passenger airbag status
. Safety Belts on page 39. indicator will be visible on the
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head . How to Wear Safety Belts instrument panel when the vehicle is
restraint height in the proper Properly on page 311. started. See Passenger Sensing
position. System (United States) on
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 312. page 325 for more information.
See Head Restraints on page 32 . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
and Seat Adjustment on page 33. Children (LATCH System) on
page 339.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-11
Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the control to the center Interior Mirrors

position so the mirror cannot be
Exterior Mirrors moved. Adjustment
Power Outside Mirrors Hold the rearview mirror in the

Manual Folding Mirrors center and move it to view the area
The vehicle has manual folding behind the vehicle.
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when Manual Rearview Mirror
going through an automatic car For vehicles with a manual rearview
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward mirror, turn the lever for daytime or
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward nighttime use. See Manual
to return it to the original position. Rearview Mirror on page 213.
Automatic Dimming Feature Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming driver outside mirror. For vehicles with an automatic
Automatic dimming reduces the dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
glare from the headlamps from will automatically reduce the glare
To adjust the power mirrors: behind. The dimming feature works from the headlamps from behind.
in conjunction with the interior The dimming feature comes on
1. Turn the knob to choose the
automatic dimming rearview mirror when the vehicle is started.
left (L) or the right (R) mirror.
and is controlled by it. See O (On/Off): Press to turn the
2. Use the knob to move the Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror dimming feature on or off.
selected mirror so the side and on page 213.
the area behind the vehicle See Automatic Dimming Rearview
is seen. Mirror on page 213.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-12 In Brief
Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel Press this button again to return it to
while driving. the out position and the lamps
Adjustment automatically come on when any
Interior Lighting door is opened.
Dome Lamps +: Press the button (2) to turn the
dome lamps on and off while the
doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever down.
There are front and rear dome
2. Move the steering wheel up lamps in the overhead console and
or down. the headliner.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel * : Press the button (1) on the The front reading lamps are in the
closer or away from you. overhead console to keep the dome overhead console.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the lamps and other interior lamps
steering wheel in place. turned off while any door is open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-13
Turn the control to the following

. Headlamp High/Low-Beam
positions: Changer on page 62
9 : Turns off the exterior lamps. Windshield Wiper/Washer
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The rear reading lamps are in the ; : Turns on the parking lamps
headliner. together with the following:
To turn the reading lamps on or off, . Sidemarker Lamps
press the button next to each lamp. . Taillamps
Exterior Lighting . License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
2 : Turns on the headlamps, The windshield wiper lever is on the
together with the previously listed right side of the steering column.
lamps and lights.
Move the lever up or down to select
See: the wiper speed.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 8: Single wipe, briefly move the
page 61 lever down. The lever returns to its
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals starting position when released. For
on page 63 several wipes, hold the lever down.
The exterior lamp control is on the
instrument panel to the left of the 9: Turns the windshield wipers off.
steering wheel. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-14 In Brief
3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

Move the switch on top of the lever
left for less frequent wipes or right The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
for more frequent wipes. this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
a: Slow wipes. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 22.
1: Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers. The wipers will
continue until the lever is released
or the maximum wash time is
reached.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is on the instrument panel above the
climate control system. Climate Control System
=: Press to wash and wipe the
rear window. 1. Fan Control 6. Air Conditioning
5 : Press to turn the delayed 2. Outside Air 7. Driver and Passenger Heated
wiping on or off. 3. Temperature Control Seats (If Equipped)
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 4. Recirculation 8. Rear Window Defogger
page 53 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 54. 5. Air Delivery Mode Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-15
Transmission
Manual Shift Mode (MSM)
This position allows you to change
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
Automatic Climate Control System
1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

2. Outside Air Seats (If Equipped)
3. Temperature Control 8. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on

page 81 or Automatic Climate
5. Air Delivery Mode Control Control System on page 84 (If
6. Air Conditioning Equipped).
2. Press the + (plus) end of the
button on the side of the shift
lever to upshift, or push the
(minus) end of the button to
downshift.
See Manual Mode on page 922.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-16 In Brief
Vehicle Features For more information about these

and other radio features, see
4. Press the softkey located below
any one of the tabs that you
Operation on page 73. want to change.
Radio(s)
Storing a Favorite Station 5. Increase or decrease the time or
O : Press to turn the system on date by turning f clockwise or
and off. Turn to increase or A maximum of 36 stations can be
decrease the volume. stored as favorites using the six counterclockwise.
softkeys located below the radio See Clock on page 56.
BAND: Press to choose between
station frequency tabs and by using
FM, AM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to Satellite Radio
f : Select radio stations. go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
SEEK or SEEK: Seek or scan based in the 48 contiguous United
stations. stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any States and 10 Canadian provinces.
4 (Information): For vehicles with combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features, stations. variety of programming and
press to display additional text commercial-free music, coast to
information related to the current See Operation on page 73. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
FM-RDS or SiriusXM station; or CD, Setting the Clock A fee is required to receive the
MP3, WMA song. Song title SiriusXM service.
information will be displayed on the To set the time and date:
top line of the display while the artist 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ For more information, refer to:
information will be displayed on the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. . www.siriusxm.com or call
bottom line, if the information is 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.)
available during XM, CD, MP3, 2. Press O to turn the radio on.
or WMA playback. When
. www.xmradio.ca or call
information is not available, "No 3. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, 1-877-209-0079 (Canada)
Info" displays. and YYYY (hour, minute, month, See Satellite Radio on page 76.
day, and year) display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-17
Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls K : Press to reject an incoming

call, or end a current call. Press to
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
silence the vehicle speakers while
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on the
using the infotainment system.
audio faceplate and a USB port in
Press again to turn the sound on.
the center console. Some portable
audio devices such as iPods, MP3 v + or v : Move the thumbwheel
players, and USB storage devices up or down to increase or to
can be connected to the vehicle decrease the volume.
using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
USB cable. Cruise Control
See Auxiliary Devices on page 719.
Bluetooth
For vehicles with a Bluetooth For vehicles with audio steering
system, it allows users with a wheel controls, some audio controls
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to can be adjusted at the steering
make and receive hands-free calls wheel.
using the vehicles audio system
and controls. + / : Press and release to go to
the next or the previous preset radio
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone station or CD track.
must be paired with the Bluetooth
system before it can be used in the J/0: For vehicles with Bluetooth
vehicle. Not all phones will support and OnStar, press to interact with
all functions. For more information, those systems. Press and release to E: Press to turn the cruise control
see www.gm.com/bluetooth and mute the system. Press it again to system on and off. An indicator light
Bluetooth on page 723. turn the sound back on. comes on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-18 In Brief
RES+: Move the thumbwheel up to T: Press to display the vehicle See Vehicle Personalization on
resume a set speed or to accelerate information displays. page 536.
to a higher speed.
U: Press to customize the feature
Rear Vision
SET: Press the thumbwheel to set settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
a speed or move the thumbwheel Personalization on page 536 for Camera (RVC)
down to decrease the speed. more information. If available, the rear vision camera
See Cruise Control on page 929. V: Press to set or reset certain displays a view of the area behind
functions and to turn off or the vehicle when the vehicle is
Driver Information acknowledge messages on the DIC. shifted into R (Reverse). The
Center (DIC) display will appear on the inside
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
rearview mirror.
The DIC has different displays in the on page 523.
instrument cluster which can be To clean the camera lens, located
Vehicle Personalization above the license plate, rinse it with
accessed by pressing the DIC
buttons on the instrument panel, Some vehicle features can be water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
below the exterior lamps control. programmed by using the DIC See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
buttons on the instrument panel to page 933.
DIC Buttons the left of the steering wheel. These
features include: Ultrasonic Parking Assist
. Language If available, this system uses
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings sensors on the rear bumper to
. Lighting assist with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse).
. Chime Volume It operates at speeds less than
3 : Press to display the trip and . Remote Start 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible
fuel displays. beeps to provide distance and
system information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-19
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Universal Remote System Performance and
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation. Maintenance
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 931. Traction Control
System (TCS)
Power Outlets The TCS limits wheel spin. The
The accessory power outlets can be system is on when the vehicle is
used to plug in electrical equipment, The Universal Home Remote started.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. System allows for garage door
To turn off or on TCS, press
openers, security systems, and
The power outlets are located inside and release the TCS/StabiliTrak
home automation devices to be
the center floor console, on the rear programmed to work with these button g on the instrument panel.
of the center floor console, and in The appropriate DIC message
buttons in the vehicle.
the rear cargo compartment. displays. See Ride Control System
See Universal Remote System on Messages on page 532.
Remove the cover to access and
page 541.
replace when not in use. This vehicle also has a Brake Pedal
See Power Outlets on page 57. Override feature that limits engine
torque when the brake pedal is
applied. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 927.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-20 In Brief
StabiliTrak System The TPMS does not replace normal

monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
The StabiliTrak system assists with the correct tire pressures.
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions. The See Tire Pressure Monitor System
system is on when the vehicle is on page 1045.
started.
The low tire pressure warning light Engine Oil Life System
. To turn off both Traction Control alerts to a significant loss in
and StabiliTrak, press and hold pressure of one of the vehicle's The engine oil life system calculates
the TCS/StabiliTrak button g tires. If the warning light comes on, engine oil life based on vehicle use
stop as soon as possible and inflate and displays a CHANGE ENGINE
until g illuminates and the OIL SOON or CHANGE ENGINE
appropriate DIC message the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and OIL NOW message when it is time
displays. See Ride Control to change the engine oil and filter.
System Messages on page 532. Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 910. Resetting the Oil Life System
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak The warning light will remain on until
button g again to turn on both the tire pressure is corrected. Reset the system whenever the
systems. engine oil is changed so that the
The low tire pressure warning light system can calculate the next
See StabiliTrak System on may come on in cool weather when engine oil change. To reset the
page 928. the vehicle is first started, and then system:
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the 1. Press the DIC vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitor information button to display OIL
tire pressures are getting low and
This vehicle may have a Tire the tires need to be inflated to the LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). proper pressure. See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 523 and Engine
Oil Messages on page 530.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Brief 1-21
. Always follow posted speed
2. Press the DIC Set/Reset button Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) limits or drive more slowly when
for five seconds to reset the oil
life at 100%. Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can conditions require.
use either unleaded gasoline or
Be careful not to reset the oil life
. Keep vehicle tires properly
ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
display accidentally at any time inflated.
ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%
other than after the oil is Ethanol) on page 936. For all other . Combine several trips into a
changed. It cannot be reset vehicles, use only the unleaded single trip.
accurately until the next oil gasoline described under
change.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Recommended Fuel on page 935. the same TPC Spec number
The oil life system can also be reset molded into the tire's sidewall
as follows: Driving for Better Fuel near the size.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN Economy . Follow recommended scheduled
with the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel maintenance.
2. Fully press and release the mileage. Here are some driving tips
accelerator pedal three times to get the best fuel economy Roadside Assistance
within five seconds. possible. Program
If the OIL LIFE REMAINING . Avoid fast starts and accelerate U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
value is not 100%, the system smoothly.
needs to be reset again. .
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
Brake gradually and avoid 1-888-889-2438
See Engine Oil Life System on abrupt stops.
page 1010. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time. Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
. When road and weather New Chevrolet owners are
conditions are appropriate, use automatically enrolled in the
cruise control. Roadside Assistance Program.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-22 In Brief
See Roadside Assistance Program

(Mexico) on page 137 or Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 1311.
OnStar
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 141.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Keys and Locks
Windows Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Keys
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10
Keys and Locks Exterior Mirrors
{ WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Interior Mirrors could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13 or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Automatic Dimming Rearview vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 closing window. Do not leave
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 children in a vehicle with the
Doors Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 1320 for information transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC) Some conditions can affect the
rules and Industry Canada performance of the transmitter. See
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
If there is a decrease in the RKE System on page 22.
operating range:
. Check the distance. The
The two keys can be used for the transmitter may be too far from
ignition and all locks. the vehicle.
The key code is stamped on the key . Check the location. Other
number plate and can be used to vehicles or objects may be
make new keys at any dealer. Store blocking the signal.
this information in a safe place
outside the vehicle.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
See Battery Replacement later
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, in this section.
inspect the key blade for debris.
Periodically clean with a brush
. If the transmitter is still not
or pick. working correctly, see your Without Remote Start Shown, with
dealer or a qualified technician Remote Start Similar
With an active OnStar subscription, for service.
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 141. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For L (Vehicle Locator/Panic When the replacement transmitter is
vehicles with this feature, this button Alarm): Press and release to programmed to the vehicle, all
is used to operate the remote start locate the vehicle. The turn signal remaining transmitters must also be
feature. See Remote Vehicle Start lamps flash and the horn sounds programmed. Any lost or stolen
on page 24. three times. Press and hold L to transmitters no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the activate the panic alarm. The turn
Each vehicle can have up to eight
doors, including the liftgate. The signal lamps flash and the horn
transmitters programmed to it.
vehicle's lamps may flash and the sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
horn may sound. See Remote Door The alarm turns off when the Battery Replacement
Lock under Vehicle Personalization ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
on page 536. when L is pressed again. The REMOTE KEY FOB BATTERY
On some models, the fuel door will ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for message displays on the Driver
also be locked when the doors are the panic alarm to work. Information Center (DIC). See
locked. Programming Transmitters to REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
K (Unlock): BATTERY under Key and Lock
Press once to unlock the Vehicle
Messages on page 532.
the driver door. If K is pressed Only RKE transmitters programmed
again within five seconds, all Notice: When replacing the
to the vehicle will work. If a
remaining doors unlock. The interior battery, do not touch any of the
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
lamps come on and stay on for circuitry on the transmitter. Static
replacement can be purchased and
20 seconds or until the ignition is from your body could damage the
programmed through your dealer.
turned on. The exterior lamps may transmitter.
flash when unlocking the vehicle.
See Remote Door Unlock under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 536 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using

Remote Start
This vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that starts the To start the vehicle:
engine from outside of the vehicle. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
/ (Remote Start): This button is vehicle.
on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle
has remote start.
2. Press and release Q on the
RKE transmitter.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters. 3. Immediately after completing
For example, some laws may Step 2, press and hold / until
require a person using the remote the parking lamps flash. If the
To replace the battery: start to have the vehicle in view vehicle's lights can not be seen,
1. Separate the transmitter with a when doing so. Check local press and hold / for at least
flat, thin object inserted into the regulations for any requirements on four seconds.
notch on the side. remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
2. Remove the old battery. Do not Do not use the remote start feature lamps will turn on and remain on as
use a metal object. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The long as the engine is running. The
vehicle could run out of fuel. doors will be locked and the climate
3. Insert the new battery, positive control system will operate at the
side facing down. Replace with a The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
range may be less while the vehicle same setting as when the vehicle
CR2032 or equivalent battery. was last turned off.
is running.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. After entering the vehicle during a
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See remote start, insert and turn the key
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to the ON/RUN position to drive the
System on page 22. vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vehicle is left running, it A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which the
automatically shuts off after remote start attempts are allowed Remote Start Will Not Work
10 minutes unless a time extension between ignition cycles.
has been done. The vehicle cannot be started using
After the vehicle's engine has been the remote start feature if the key is
Extending Engine Run Time started two times using the remote in the ignition, the hood is open, or if
start button, the ignition must be there is an emission control system
To extend the engine run time by turned on and then back off before malfunction.
10 minutes, repeat Steps 13 while the remote start procedure can be
the engine is still running. The used again. The engine turns off during a remote
engine run time can only be start if the coolant temperature gets
extended if it is the first remote start Shutting the Engine Off After a too high or if the oil pressure
since the vehicle has been driven. Remote Start gets low.
Remote start can be extended
one time.
To manually shut off a remote start: Remote Start Ready
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
If the remote start procedure is used If the vehicle does not have the
again before the first 10-minute time vehicle and press / until the remote vehicle start feature, it may
frame has ended, the first parking lamps turn off. have the remote start ready feature.
10 minutes will immediately expire This feature allows your dealer to
. Turn on the hazard warning add the manufacturer's remote
and the second 10-minute time flashers.
frame will start. vehicle start feature.
. Turn the ignition switch on and To add the manufacturer's remote
For example, if Q and then / are then off. vehicle start feature to the vehicle,
pressed again after the vehicle has see your dealer.
been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the
engine to run for a total of
15 minutes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Delayed Locking
A chime will sound to indicate a
{ WARNING injuries or even death from door or the liftgate is open when you
heat stroke. Always lock the try to lock the doors with the power
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. door lock switch. The doors will not
dangerous. lock, and the theftdeterrent system
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door will not arm until all the doors are
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop closed and five seconds have
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors passed.
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening. Automatic Door Locks
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a Automatic Door Lock
crash is increased if the To lock or unlock a door, use the
key from the outside or the door The doors are programmed to
doors are not locked. So, all automatically lock when the shift
passengers should wear lock from the inside.
lever is moved out of P (Park).
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked Power Door Locks This feature can be programmed
whenever the vehicle is through the Driver Information
Use the power door lock switch on Center (DIC). See Auto Door Lock
driven. the front doors. in Vehicle Personalization on
. Young children who get into Q: Press to lock the doors. page 536.
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can K: Press to unlock the doors.
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Door Unlock Safety Locks To activate, insert a key into the slot
and turn it to the horizontal position.
The doors can be programmed to The vehicle has rear door security The door can only be opened from
automatically unlock when the shift locks to prevent passengers from the outside.
lever is moved into P (Park). See opening the rear doors from the
Auto Door Unlock in Vehicle inside. To return the door to normal
Personalization on page 536. operation, open the door and turn
the slot to the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
When the power door lock switch is
pressed with the key in the ignition,
and any door is open, all the doors
lock and the driver door unlocks.
When doors are closed with the key
in the ignition, the horn will sound
as a reminder.
If the doors are locked with the
transmitter, and the key is in the
ignition, a chime sounds and all Open the rear doors to access the
except the driver door lock. security locks on the inside edge of
each door.
The lockout protection feature can
be overridden by holding the power
door lock switch for three seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Doors WARNING (Continued)

To lock or unlock the liftgate from
outside the vehicle, press Q or K
Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control twice on the Remote Keyless
system to a setting that Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the System Operation on page 22.
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate To lock or unlock the liftgate from
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index. inside the vehicle, press Q or K on
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . If the vehicle is equipped with the power door lock switch. See
any objects that pass through the a power liftgate, disable the Power Door Locks on page 26.
seal between the body and the power liftgate function.
To open the liftgate, press the touch
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about pad on the underside of the liftgate
exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine handle and pull up.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 919.
seen or smelled. It can cause To close the liftgate, pull down using
unconsciousness and even death. the handle and close until it latches.
Notice: To avoid damage to the
If the vehicle must be driven with liftgate or liftgate glass, make
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: sure the area above and behind
. Close all of the windows. the liftgate is clear before
opening it.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Vehicle Security vehicles equipped with the remote
Power start feature only, are closed. The
This vehicle has theft-deterrent security light will come on solid for
features; however, they do not make approximately 30 seconds and then
the vehicle impossible to steal. flash slowly. If Q on the RKE
transmitter is pressed a second
Vehicle Alarm System time, the theft-deterrent system will
The vehicle may have a content arm immediately, bypassing the
theft-deterrent alarm system. 30-second delay. The content-theft
deterrent alarm is not armed until
the security light flashes slowly.
If any door, liftgate, or the hood, on
vehicles equipped with the remote
start feature only, are opened
To open the liftgate if the vehicle's without using the key or pressing K
battery is disconnected or the on the RKE transmitter, the exterior
voltage is low, access the release lamps flash and the horn will sound
lever. Remove the interior trim cover for about 30 seconds. If Q or K on
on the inside of the liftgate. Use a the RKE transmitter is not pressed,
tool to push the lever on the latch the alarm sounds and periodically
until the liftgate releases. repeats. If the system does not
operate as described above, see
The security light is near the center your dealer for service.
of the instrument panel.
The theft-deterrent system does not
To arm the theft-deterrent system, arm if you lock the doors with a key.
press Q on the RKE transmitter
when all doors
Inf
ormat
i
and
onPr
ovi
the hood, on
dedby:
To avoid setting off the alarm by 4. Reach in through the window, Immobilizer Operation
accident, always unlock a door with unlock the door with the manual
the RKE transmitter or a key. door lock, and open the door. This vehicle has PASS-Key III+
Unlocking a door any other way will This should set off the alarm. (Personalized Automotive Security
set off the alarm if the system has System) theft-deterrent system.
If the alarm does not sound when it PASS-Key III+ is a passive
been armed. should, but the vehicle's headlamps theft-deterrent system.
If you set off the alarm by accident, flash, check to see if the horn
The system is automatically armed
turn off the alarm by pressing Q or works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and when the key is removed from the
K on the RKE transmitter or by ignition.
placing the key in the ignition and Circuit Breakers on page 1030.
turning it to START. If the alarm does not sound or the You do not have to manually arm or
vehicle's headlamps do not flash, disarm the system.
Testing the Alarm see your dealer for service. The security light comes on if there
To test the alarm: is a problem with the theft-deterrent
1. From inside the vehicle, lower Immobilizer system operation.
the driver window and open the See Radio Frequency Statement on When the PASS-Key III+ system
driver door. page 1320 for information senses that someone is using the
2. Get out of the vehicle, close the regarding Part 15 of the Federal wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
door, and activate the system by Communications Commission (FCC) from starting. Anyone using a
locking the doors with the RKE rules and Industry Canada trial-and-error method to start the
transmitter. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. vehicle will be discouraged because
of the high number of electrical key
3. Wait for the security light to flash codes.
slowly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When trying to start the vehicle if Up to 10 keys may be programmed 3. After the engine has started, turn
the engine does not start and the for the vehicle. The following the key to LOCK/OFF, and
security light on the instrument procedure is for programming remove the key.
cluster comes on, there may be a additional keys only. If all the 4. Insert the key to be programmed
problem with the theft-deterrent currently programmed keys are lost and turn it to the ON/RUN
system. Turn the ignition off and try or do not operate, you must see position within five seconds of
again. your dealer or a locksmith who can the original key being turned to
If the engine still does not start, and service PASS-Key III+ to have keys the LOCK/OFF position.
the key does not appear to be made and programmed to the
system. The security light turns off once
damaged, wait about five minutes the key has been programmed.
and try another ignition key and See your dealer or a locksmith who
check the fuse. See Fuses and can service PASS-Key III+ to get a 5. Repeat Steps 14 if additional
Circuit Breakers on page 1030. new key blank that is cut exactly as keys are to be programmed.
If the engine still does not start with the ignition key that operates the If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
the other key, the vehicle needs system. damaged, see your dealer or a
service. If the vehicle does start, the To program the new key: locksmith to have a new key made.
first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the 1. Verify that the new key has 1 Do not leave the key or device that
PASS-Key III+ to have a new stamped on it. disarms or deactivates the
key made. theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
2. Insert the already programmed
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ key in the ignition and start the
decoder to learn the transponder engine. If the engine does not
value of a new or replacement key. start, see your dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature

The vehicle may have an automatic
Convex Mirrors dimming driver outside mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps from
{ WARNING behind. The dimming feature works
A convex mirror can make things, in conjunction with the interior
like other vehicles, look farther automatic dimming rearview mirror
away than they really are. If you and is controlled by it. See
cut too sharply into the right lane, Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
on page 213.
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
Folding Mirrors
changing lanes. Manual Folding Mirrors
To adjust the power mirrors:
The vehicle has manual folding
The passenger side mirror is convex 1. Turn the knob to choose the
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is left (L) or the right (R) mirror.
inward to prevent damage when
curved so more can be seen from 2. Use the knob to move the going through an automatic car
the driver seat. selected mirror so the side and wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the area behind the vehicle the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
is seen. to return it to the original position.
3. Return the control to the center
position so the mirror cannot be
moved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors For vehicles with an automatic

dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
The vehicle may have heated will automatically reduce the glare
mirrors. Manual Rearview Mirror from the headlamps from behind.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Hold the rearview mirror in the The dimming feature comes on
Press to heat the outside rearview center and move it to view the area when the vehicle is started.
mirrors. See Rear Window behind the vehicle. O (On/Off): Press to turn the
Defogger under Automatic Climate Reduce the glare of headlamps from dimming feature on or off.
Control System on page 84. behind by turning the lever for The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
daytime or nighttime use. Camera (RVC). See Rear Vision
The vehicle may have a rear vision Camera (RVC) on page 933.
camera (RVC). See Rear Vision
If the vehicle has a RVC, the O
Camera (RVC) on page 933.
button for turning the dimming
feature on or off will not be
Automatic Dimming available.
Rearview Mirror
Cleaning the Mirror
To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
hold the rearview mirror in the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
center and move it to view the area on the mirror. Use a soft towel
behind the vehicle. dampened with water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windows Power Windows Press the front of the switch to open

the window. Pull the switch up to
close it.
{ WARNING { WARNING The power windows operate when
Never leave a child, a helpless Children could be seriously the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
especially with the windows path of a closing window. Never Accessory Power (RAP). See
closed in warm or hot weather. leave keys in a vehicle with Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
They can be overcome by the children. When there are children on page 917.
extreme heat and suffer in the rear seat, use the window Express-Down Window
permanent injuries or even death lockout button to prevent
from heat stroke. operation of the windows. See The driver window switch has an
Keys on page 21. express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
switch. Press the switch part way
and the window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down all
the way and release it and the
window lowers all the way.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, press and release the
switch.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Window Lockout Roof 1. Open/Close: Slide and release

the switch rearward to express
This feature prevents the rear seat
open the sunroof. Slide the
passengers from operating the Sunroof switch forward or rearward to
windows. Press the lockout switch
stop movement.
on the driver door panel to activate
the switch. Press it again to The sunshade opens
deactivate the switch. automatically with the sunroof or
can be manually operated. The
Sun Visors sunshade cannot be closed with
the sunroof open.
Slide and hold the switch
forward to close the sunroof.
The sunshade must be closed
manually.
2. Vent Open/Close: Press and
hold the switch to vent the
To operate the sunroof, the ignition sunroof. Pull and hold the switch
must be in ON/RUN, or ACC/ to close it. The sunshade must
ACCESSORY, or Retained be manually operated when the
Pull the sun visor down to block Accessory Power (RAP) must be sunroof is in the vent position.
glare. If equipped, detach the sun active. See Retained Accessory
visor from the center mount to pivot Power (RAP) on page 917.
to the side window or to extend
along the rod.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Safety Belt Use During Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-29
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-31
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Child Restraints
Front Seats Airbag System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Infants and Young
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-20 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-36
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-37
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 for Children (LATCH
How Does an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
What Will You See after an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Passenger Sensing System (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
How to Wear Safety Belts (United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Securing Child Restraints
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-46
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
{ WARNING head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly, Front Seats
there is a greater chance that The vehicle's front seats have
occupants will suffer a neck/ adjustable head restraints in the
spinal injury in a crash. Do not outboard seating positions.
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and The height of the head restraint can
adjusted properly. be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head To lower the head restraint, press
restraint to make sure that it is the button located on the top of the
locked in place. seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

position and release the bar.
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and
outboard seating positions that can forth to be sure the seat is
be adjusted the same way as the locked in place.
front head restraints.
{ WARNING
Seat Height Adjuster
Rear outboard head restraints are You can lose control of the
not designed to be removed. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Active Head Restraints Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt To adjust a manual seat:
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
behind.
If available, move the lever up or

down to raise or lower the seat.
1. Lift the Ibar

nf
or to
mat
ionPunlock
r dedby: the seat.
ovi
Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
If available, move the control front or rear of the control up If equipped, move the lever forward
forward or rearward to adjust the or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
seat position. the lumbar support.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if To recline the seatback:
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
other injuries. 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
Manual Reclining Seatbacks side of the seat.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces 2. Move the seatback to the
would be there, not at your pelvic { WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
bones. This could cause serious
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause make sure it is locked.
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward
position: to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
Heated Front Seats
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. { WARNING
2. Push and pull on the seatback to If you cannot feel temperature
make sure it is locked. change or pain to the skin, the
Power Reclining Seatbacks seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater, Automatic Climate Control System
especially for long periods of Shown
time. Do not place anything on
If available, the buttons are on the
the seat that insulates against climate control panel. To operate,
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition must be on.
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to Press L or M to heat the driver or
overheat. An overheated seat passenger seat cushion and
heater may cause a burn or may seatback.
damage the seat. Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
To adjust a power seatback, the button, the heated seat will
if equipped: change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
. Tilt the top of the control
lights indicate two for the highest
rearward to recline.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: setting and one for the lowest.
The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up. { WARNING
Things you put on this seatback
Folding Seatback can strike and injure people in a
The front passenger seatback may sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
fold flat. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
{ WARNING
If you fold the seatback forward to To fold the seatback:
carry longer objects, such as skis, 1. Lower the head restraint all the
be sure any such cargo is not way. See Head Restraints on
near an airbag. In a crash, an page 32. 3. Lift the lever fully and fold the
inflating airbag might force that seatback forward until it
2. Move the seat as far back as disengages.
object toward a person. This possible. See Seat Adjustment
could cause severe injury or even on page 33. 4. Continue lowering the seatback
death. Secure objects away from until it is completely folded.
the area in which an airbag would To raise the seatback:
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on 1. Raise the seatback and push it
page 320 and Vehicle Load rearward until it re-engages.
Limits on page 910.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
{ WARNING Rear Seats

Folding the Seatback
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden To fold a seatback:
stop or crash. That could cause Notice: Folding a rear seat with
injury to the person sitting there. the safety belts still fastened may
Always push and pull on the cause damage to the seat or the
seatbacks to be sure they are safety belts. Always unbuckle the
locked. safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
make sure it is locked in place. 1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts 2. Lift the lever on the top of the
and put the front seatback in the seatback and fold the seatback
upright position. See Reclining forward.
Seatbacks on page 35.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other seatback, if desired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Raising the Seatback To return the seatback to the upright Safety Belts
position:
{ WARNING 1. Lift the seatback up and push it
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
back into place.
If either seatback is not locked, it properly. It also describes some
could move forward in a sudden 2. Push and pull the top of the things not to do with safety belts.
stop or crash. That could cause seatback to be sure it is locked
injury to the person sitting there. into position. { WARNING
Always push and pull on the 3. Make sure the safety belts are
seatbacks to be sure they are not twisted or caught in the Do not let anyone ride where a
locked. seatback. safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
passenger(s) are not wearing
other seatback, if necessary.
safety belts, injuries can be much
{ WARNING When the seatback is not in use, it worse than if you are wearing
should be kept in the upright, locked safety belts. You can be seriously
A safety belt that is improperly position. injured or killed by hitting things
routed, not properly attached, inside the vehicle harder or by
or twisted will not provide the Reclining the Seatback
being ejected from the vehicle. In
protection needed in a crash. The To recline the seatback: addition, anyone who is not
person wearing the belt could be 1. Lift and hold the lever on top of buckled up can strike other
seriously injured. After raising the the seatback. passengers in the vehicle.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and (Continued)
properly routed and attached, and then release the lever.
are not twisted. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other seatback, if desired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

WARNING (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
It is extremely dangerous to ride Questions and Answers About
in a cargo area, inside or outside Safety Belts
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
are more likely to be seriously after a crash if I am wearing a
injured or killed. Do not allow safety belt?
passengers to ride in any area of A: You could be whether you are
the vehicle that is not equipped wearing a safety belt or not.
with seats and safety belts. Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
Always wear a safety belt, and can unbuckle and get out, is
check that all passenger(s) are much greater if you are belted.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you. belts?
reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
page 511. systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { WARNING
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 332 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 334. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
straight. To see how, see Seats If the shoulder portion of a
in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
On vehicles with a Passenger make sure it is secure. If the belt
Sensing System, engaging the is not long enough, see Safety
child restraint locking feature in Belt Extender on page 316.
the right front seating position Position the release button on
may affect the passenger the buckle so that the safety belt
sensing system. See Passenger could be quickly unbuckled if
Sensing System (United States) necessary.
on page 325 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height that is right for you. See
height adjuster for the driver and
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
right front passenger seating
later in this section for
positions.
instructions on use and
important safety information. Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 311.
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a
It may be necessary to pull the door is slammed against a safety
stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the
through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle.
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
are part of the safety belt assembly. properly adjusted, the comfort guide
They can help tighten the safety positions the shoulder belt away
belts during the early stages of a from the neck and head.
moderate to severe frontal or near There is one guide, if equipped, for
frontal crash if the threshold each outboard passenger position in
conditions for pretensioner the rear seat. Here is how to install
activation are met. And, for vehicles a comfort guide to the safety belt:
with side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the 1. Remove the guide from its
safety belts in a side crash or a storage location, which is a
rollover event. pocket on the side of the seat.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
Squeeze the release buttons pretensioners activate in a crash,
together and move the height they will need to be replaced, and
adjuster up or down to the desired probably other new parts for the
position. vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After the adjuster is set to the after a Crash on page 317.
desired position, try to move it up or
down without squeezing the release Rear Safety Belt Comfort
buttons to make sure it has locked Guides
into position.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
Safety Belt Pretensioners belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
This vehicle has safety belt 2. Place the guide over the belt
guides may provide added safety
pretensioners for the front outboard and insert the two edges of the
belt comfort for older children who
occupants. Although the safety belt belt into the slots of the guide.
have outgrown booster seats and
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
for some adults.
Inf
or
When
mat
ionPr
ovi
installed and
dedby:
4. Buckle, position, and release the

{ WARNING safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
A safety belt that is not properly sure the shoulder portion of the
worn may not provide the belt is on the shoulder and not
protection needed in a crash. The falling off of it. The belt should
person wearing the belt could be be close to, but not contacting,
seriously injured. The shoulder the neck.
belt should go over the shoulder
To remove and store the comfort
and across the chest. These parts
guide, squeeze the belt edges
of the body are best able to take
together so that the safety belt can
belt restraining forces. be removed from the guide. Store
3. Be sure that the belt is not the comfort guide in its storage
twisted and it lies flat. The location, which is a pocket on the
elastic cord must be under the side of the seat.
belt and the guide on top.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safety Belt Extender Look for any other loose or

damaged safety belt system parts
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten that might keep a safety belt system
around you, you should use it. from doing its job. See your dealer
But if a safety belt is not long to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
enough, your dealer will order you safety belts may not protect you in a
an extender. When you go in to crash. They can rip apart under
order it, take the heaviest coat you impact forces. If a belt is torn or
will wear, so the extender will be frayed, get a new one right away.
long enough for you. To help avoid Make sure the safety belt reminder
personal injury, do not let someone light is working. See Safety Belt
else use it, and use it only for the Reminders on page 511.
A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never Keep safety belts clean and dry.
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap See Safety Belt Care on page 316.
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. See the instruction sheet that Safety Belt Care
throughout the pregnancy.
comes with the extender. Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety Safety System Check
belt is worn properly, it is more likely { WARNING
that the fetus will not be hurt in a Now and then, check that the safety
crash. For pregnant women, as for belt reminder light, safety belts, Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
anyone, the key to making safety buckles, latch plates, retractors, and It may severely weaken them. In
belts effective is wearing them anchorages are all working properly. a crash, they might not be able to
properly. provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the right front
serious injury or even death in a passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light and the passenger seated
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary directly behind the driver.
or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 512.
. A roof-rail airbag for the right
possible. front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For frontal airbags, the word Here are the most important things
AIRBAG will appear on the middle { WARNING to know about the airbag system:
part of the steering wheel for the
Be sure that cargo is not near an
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger. airbag. In a crash, an inflating { WARNING
airbag might force that object You can be severely injured or
With seat-mounted side impact toward a person. This could
airbags, the word AIRBAG will killed in a crash if you are not
cause severe injury or even wearing your safety belt, even
appear on the side of the seatback death. Secure objects away from
closest to the door. with airbags. Airbags are
the area in which an airbag would designed to work with safety
With roof-rail airbags, the word inflate. For more information, see belts, not replace them. Also,
AIRBAG will appear along the Where Are the Airbags? on airbags are not designed to inflate
headliner or trim. page 320 and Vehicle Load in every crash. In some crashes
Even if you do not have a right front Limits on page 910. safety belts are the only restraint.
passenger seat in the vehicle there See When Should an Airbag
is still an active frontal airbag in the Airbags are designed to supplement Inflate? on page 321.
right side of the instrument panel. the protection provided by safety
Do not place cargo in front of this Wearing your safety belt during a
belts. Even though today's airbags
airbag. crash helps reduce the chance of
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an hitting things inside the vehicle or
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate being ejected from it. Airbags are
very quickly to do their job. supplemental restraints to the
safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
{ WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
against, or very close to any or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument cluster, which
seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
shows the airbag symbol.
sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt The system checks the airbag
on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
you in position before and during children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 512 for
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always more information.
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 332 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 334.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side Shown, Passenger

airbag is in the instrument panel on Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags are designed to
inflating airbag must be kept inflate in moderate to severe frontal
clear. Do not put anything or near frontal crashes to help
between an occupant and an reduce the potential for severe
airbag, and do not attach or put injuries mainly to the driver's or right
anything on the steering wheel front passenger's head and chest.
hub or on or near any other However, they are only designed to
airbag covering. inflate if the impact exceeds a
Do not use seat accessories that predetermined deployment
Driver Side Shown, Passenger block the inflation path of a threshold. Deployment thresholds
Side Similar are used to predict how severe a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
crash is likely to be in time for the
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, Never secure anything to the roof airbags to inflate and help restrain
right front passenger, and second of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the occupants.
row outboard passengers are in the by routing a rope or tiedown
ceiling above the side windows. Whether the frontal airbags will or
through any door or window should deploy is not based on how
opening. If you do, the path of an fast the vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be It depends largely on what you hit,
blocked. the direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
quickly the vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Seat-mounted side impact airbags
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. are not intended to inflate in frontal
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the impacts, near frontal impacts,
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
. If the vehicle hits an object that The vehicle has electronic frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a impact airbag is intended to deploy
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more on the side of the vehicle that is
that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags deploy when either side of the
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
(like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal system predicts that the vehicle is
inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. about to roll over, or in a severe
than if the vehicle hits a wide frontal impact.
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See In any particular crash, no one can
. If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 317. say whether an airbag should have
at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and inflated simply because of the
inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to damage to a vehicle or because of
than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side what the repair costs were. For
into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail frontal airbags, inflation is
Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate determined by what the vehicle hits,
specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe the angle of the impact, and how
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side quickly the vehicle slows down. For
impact and roof-rail airbags will seat-mounted side impact and
inflate if the crash
Inf
ormat
ioseverity
nPr dedby: is above
ovi roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and How Does an Airbag full or partial ejection in rollover
severity of the side impact. In a events, although no system can
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
Restrain? prevent all such ejections.
deployment is determined by the In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many
direction of the roll. near frontal collisions, even belted types of collisions, primarily
occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion is
What Makes an Airbag wheel or the instrument panel. In not toward those airbags. See When
Inflate? moderate to severe side collisions, Should an Airbag Inflate? on
even belted occupants can contact page 321 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing the inside of the vehicle.
system sends an electrical signal Airbags should never be regarded
Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement
triggering a release of gas from the
provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbags distribute the force of the
airbag causing the bag to break out
impact more evenly over the
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
occupant's upper body, stopping the
What Will You See after
the airbag, and related hardware are an Airbag Inflates?
occupant more gradually. Seat
all part of the airbag module.
mounted side impact and roof-rail After the frontal airbags and
Frontal airbag modules are located airbags distribute the force of the seat-mounted side impact airbags
inside the steering wheel and impact more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
instrument panel. For vehicles with occupant's upper body. quickly that some people may not
seat-mounted side impact airbags, even realize an airbag inflated.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
there are airbag modules in the side Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
of the front seatbacks closest to the partially inflated for some time after
head and chest of occupants in the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail they deploy. Some components of
outboard seating positions in the
airbags, there are airbag modules in the airbag module may be hot for
first and second rows. The rollover
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the several minutes. For location of the
capable roof-rail airbags are
side windows that have occupant airbag modules, see What Makes
designed to help reduce the risk of
seating positions. an Airbag Inflate? on page 323.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming If you experience breathing A crash severe enough to inflate
from the vents in the deflated problems following an airbag the airbags may have also
airbags. Airbag inflation does not deployment, you should seek damaged important functions in
prevent the driver from seeing out of medical attention. the vehicle, such as the fuel
the windshield or being able to steer system, brake and steering
the vehicle, nor does it prevent systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
people from leaving the vehicle. The vehicle has a feature that may appears to be drivable after a
automatically unlock the doors, turn moderate crash, there may be
on the interior lamps and hazard
{ WARNING warning flashers, and shut off the
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
When an airbag inflates, there the vehicle.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
may be dust in the air. This dust interior lamps and hazard warning Use caution if you should attempt
could cause breathing problems flashers by using the controls for to restart the engine after a crash
for people with a history of those features. You must first, has occurred.
asthma or other breathing trouble. however, turn the ignition key to the
To avoid this, everyone in the following ignition switch positions:
vehicle should get out as soon as In many crashes severe enough to
1. Turn the ignition key to inflate the airbag, windshields are
it is safe to do so. If you have
LOCK/OFF. broken by vehicle deformation.
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an 2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. Additional windshield breakage may
airbag inflates, then get fresh air also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
by opening a window or a door.
(Continued)
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system
If you do not get them, the turns off the right front passenger
airbag system will not be there
System (United States) frontal airbag under certain
to help protect you in another The vehicle has a passenger conditions. The driver airbags,
crash. A new system will include sensing system for the right front seat-mounted side impact airbags,
airbag modules and possibly passenger position. The passenger and the roof-rail airbags are not
other parts. The service manual airbag status indicator will be visible affected by the passenger sensing
for your vehicle covers the need on the instrument panel when the system.
to replace other parts. vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system
. The vehicle has a crash sensing works with sensors that are part of
and diagnostic module which the right front passenger seat and
records information after a safety belt. The sensors are
crash. See Vehicle Data designed to detect the presence of
Recording and Privacy on a properly-seated occupant and
page 1319 and Event Data determine if the right front
Recorders on page 1319. passenger frontal airbag should be
. Let only qualified technicians The words ON and OFF are visible enabled (may inflate) or not.
work on the airbag systems. during the system check. If you are According to accident statistics,
Improper service can mean that using remote start, if equipped, to children are safer when properly
an airbag system will not work start the vehicle from a distance, secured in a rear seat in a correct
properly. See your dealer for you may not see the system check. child restraint for their weight
service. When the system check is and size.
complete, either the word ON or
OFF will be visible. See Passenger We recommend that children be
Airbag Status Indicator (United secured in a rear seat, including: an
States) on page 512. infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
an older child riding in a booster The passenger sensing system is

seat; and children, who are large WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
enough, using safety belts. passenger airbag if:
Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right
. The right front passenger seat is
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no unoccupied.
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can . The system determines that an
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not infant is present in a rear-facing
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual infant seat.
circumstance, even though the
{ WARNING airbag is turned off.
. The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints restraint.
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag . The system determines that a
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a small child is present in a
passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in booster seat.
because the back of the the right front seat, always move . A right front passenger takes
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
his/her weight off of the seat for
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to a period of time.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
. The right front passenger seat is
injured or killed if the right front occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
passenger airbag inflates and the If the vehicle does not have a rear outgrown child restraints.
passenger seat is in a forward seat that will accommodate a
position. rear-facing child restraint, a
. Or, if there is a critical problem
(Continued) rear-facing child restraint should not with the airbag system or the
be installed in the vehicle, even if passenger sensing system.
the airbag is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the passenger sensing build. Everyone in the vehicle who 3. Remove any additional items
system has turned off the right front has outgrown child restraints should from the seat such as blankets,
passenger frontal airbag, the off wear a safety belt properly cushions, seat covers, seat
indicator will light and stay lit to whether or not there is an airbag for heaters, or seat massagers.
remind you that the airbags are off. that person. 4. Reinstall the child restraint
See Passenger Airbag Status following the directions provided
Indicator (United States) on
page 512.
{ WARNING by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
The passenger sensing system is If the airbag readiness light ever Securing Child Restraints (Rear
designed to turn on (may inflate) the comes on and stays on, it means Seat) on page 344 or Securing
right front passenger frontal airbag that something may be wrong Child Restraints (Front
anytime the system senses that a with the airbag system. To help Passenger Seat) on page 346.
person of adult size is sitting avoid injury to yourself or others,
5. If, after reinstalling the child
properly in the right front have the vehicle serviced right
restraint and restarting the
passenger seat. away. See Airbag Readiness
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
When the passenger sensing Light on page 512 for more turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
system has allowed the airbag to be information, including important recline the vehicle seatback and
enabled, the on indicator will light safety information. adjust the seat cushion,
and stay lit to remind you that the if adjustable, to make sure that
airbag is active. If the On Indicator is Lit for a the vehicle seatback is not
For some children who have Child Restraint pushing the child restraint into
outgrown child restraints, and for the seat cushion.
If a child restraint has been installed
very small adults, the passenger and the on indicator is lit:
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal 1. Turn the vehicle off.
airbag, depending upon the 2. Remove the child restraint from
persons seating posture and body the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Also make sure the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material
restraint is not trapped under the Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets,
vehicle head restraint. If this cushions, seat covers, seat
happens, adjust the head heaters, or seat massagers.
restraint. See Head Restraints 3. Place the seatback in the fully
on page 32. upright position.
6. Restart the vehicle. 4. Have the person sit upright in
If the on indicator is still lit, the seat, centered on the seat
secure the child restraint in a cushion, with legs comfortably
rear seat position in the vehicle, extended.
and check with your dealer. 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
If no rear seat is available, do person remain in this position for
not install a child restraint in this two to three minutes after the on
vehicle. indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in Additional Factors Affecting
the right front passenger seat, but System Operation
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting Safety belts help keep the
properly in the seat. If this happens, passenger in position on the seat
use the following steps to allow the during vehicle maneuvers and
system to detect that person and braking, which helps the passenger
enable the right front passenger sensing system maintain the
frontal airbag: passenger airbag status. See
Safety Belts and Child Restraints
1. Turn the vehicle off. in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the shoulder portion of the belt is unoccupied seat. If this is not

pulled out all the way, the child desired remove the object from { WARNING
restraint locking feature will be the seat.
engaged. This may unintentionally For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for
{ WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag
some adult size occupants. If this Stowing of articles under the can still inflate during improper
happens, let the belt go back all the passenger seat or between the service. You can be injured if you
way and start again. passenger seat cushion and are close to an airbag when it
seatback may interfere with the inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
A thick layer of additional material,
proper operation of the passenger They are probably part of the
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. airbag system. Be sure to follow
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat proper service procedures, and
massagers can affect how well the make sure the person performing
passenger sensing system Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
operates. We recommend that you Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
Airbags affect how the vehicle Adding Equipment to the
should be serviced. There are parts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
approved by GM for your specific
of the airbag system in several
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Q: Is there anything I might add
places around the vehicle. Your
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on to or change about the vehicle
dealer and the service manual have
page 329 for more information that could keep the airbags
information about servicing the
about modifications that can affect from working properly?
vehicle and the airbag system. To
how the system operates.
purchase a service manual, see A: Yes. If you add things that
The on indicator may be lit if an Service Publications Ordering change the vehicle's frame,
object, such as a briefcase, Information on page 1316. bumper system, height, front end
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or or side sheet metal, they may
other electronic device, is put on an I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
keep the airbag system from of the seat fabric, could also Q: Because I have a disability,
working properly. Changing or interfere with the operation of I have to get my vehicle
moving any parts of the front the passenger sensing system. modified. How can I find out
seats, safety belts, the airbag This could either prevent proper whether this will affect my
sensing and diagnostic module, deployment of the passenger airbag system?
steering wheel, instrument airbag(s) or prevent the A: If you have questions, call
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, passenger sensing system from Customer Assistance. The
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish properly turning off the phone numbers and addresses
trim, overhead console, front passenger airbag(s). See for Customer Assistance are in
sensors, side impact sensors, Passenger Sensing System Step Two of the Customer
or airbag wiring can affect the (United States) on page 325. Satisfaction Procedure in this
operation of the airbag system. If you have questions, call manual. See Customer
In addition, the vehicle has a Customer Assistance. The Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
passenger sensing system for phone numbers and addresses Canada) on page 132 or
the right front passenger for Customer Assistance are in Customer Satisfaction
position, which includes sensors Step Two of the Customer Procedure (Mexico) on
that are part of the passenger Satisfaction Procedure in this page 134.
seat. The passenger sensing manual. See Customer
system may not operate properly Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and In addition, the dealer and the
if the original seat trim is Canada) on page 132 or service manual have information
replaced with non-GM covers, Customer Satisfaction about the location of the airbag
upholstery or trim, or with GM Procedure (Mexico) on sensors, sensing and diagnostic
covers, upholstery or trim page 134. module and airbag wiring.
designed for a different vehicle. If the vehicle has rollover
Any object, such as an roof-rail airbags, see Different
aftermarket seat heater or a Size Tires and Wheels on
comfort enhancing pad or page 1052 for additional
device, installed under or on top important information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
page 512. systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light on
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may not
page 512.
airbag may not work properly. Do protect you and your
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To
opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 320. See your dealer for possible.
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
page 312. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat. Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 312.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint The child could move too far
system secured in a rear seating forward increasing the chance of
position. head and neck injury. The child
In a crash, children who are not might also slide under the lap
buckled up can strike other people belt. The belt force would then be
who are buckled up, or can be applied right on the abdomen.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older That could cause serious or fatal
children need to use safety belts injuries. The shoulder belt should
properly. go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow more than one child
safety belt with the shoulder belt
to wear the same safety belt. The
behind their back. A child can be
safety belt cannot properly spread
seriously injured by not wearing
the impact forces. In a crash, they
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
can be crushed together and
crash, the child would not be
seriously injured. A safety belt
restrained by the shoulder belt.
must be used by only one person
at a time. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Infants and Young safety belt system nor its airbag

system is designed for them. Every
Children time infants and young children ride
Everyone in a vehicle needs in vehicles, they should have the
protection! This includes infants and protection provided by appropriate
all other children. Neither the child restraints.
distance traveled nor the age and Children who are not restrained
size of the traveler changes the properly can strike other people,
need, for everyone, to use safety or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restraints.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to { WARNING
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and Children who are up against,
will become so heavy it is not or very close to, any airbag when
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children it inflates can be seriously injured
For example, in a crash at only or killed. Never put a rear-facing
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
allow children to play with the child restraint in the right front
infant will suddenly become a seat. Secure a rear-facing child
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's restraint in a rear seat. It is also
arms. An infant should be better to secure a forward-facing
Airbags plus lapshoulder belts offer secured in an appropriate child restraint in a rear seat. If you
protection for adults and older restraint. must secure a forward-facing
children, but not for young children
child restraint in the right front
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For most basic types of child

WARNING (Continued) restraints, there are many different { WARNING
models available. When purchasing
seat, always move the front a child restraint, be sure it is A young child's hip bones are still
passenger seat as far back as it designed to be used in a motor so small that the vehicle's regular
will go. vehicle. safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
The restraint manufacturer's Instead, it may settle up around
instructions should state the weight the child's abdomen. In a crash,
and height limitations for a particular
the belt would apply force on a
child restraint.
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
{ WARNING could cause serious or fatal
To reduce the risk of neck and injuries. To reduce the risk of
head injury during a crash, infants serious or fatal injuries during a
need complete support. In a crash, young children should
crash, if an infant is in a always be secured in appropriate
rear-facing child restraint, the child restraints.
crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an
Selection of a particular restraint
infant's body, the back and
should take into consideration not
shoulders. Infants should always
only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the be secured in rear-facing child
restraint will be compatible with the restraints.
motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Securing an Add-On Child endangered in a crash if the child Administration (NHTSA) website to
Restraint in the Vehicle restraint is not properly secured in locate the nearest child safety seat
the vehicle. inspection station.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child Securing the Child Within the
restraint, refer to the instructions Child Restraint
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. { WARNING
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are A child can be seriously injured or
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
killed in a crash if the child is not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
properly secured in the child
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
restraint. Secure the child
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured properly following the instructions
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a that came with that child restraint.
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in Where to Put the
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle even when no child is Restraint
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
According to accident statistics,
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States, children and infants are safer when
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Certified Child Passenger Safety properly restrained in a child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Technicians (CPSTs) are available restraint system or infant restraint
the LATCH system. See Lower to inspect and demonstrate how to system secured in a rear seating
Anchors and Tethers for Children correctly use and install child position.
(LATCH System) on page 339 for restraints. In the U.S., refer to the
more information. Children can be National Highway Traffic Safety
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
We recommend that children and

child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to
booster seat; and children, who are position. secure the child restraint in a
large enough, using safety belts. The vehicle may have a rear seat.
A label on the sun visor says, passenger sensing system which See Passenger Sensing System
Never put a rear-facing child is designed to turn off the right (United States) on page 325 for
restraint in the front. This is front passenger frontal airbag additional information.
because the risk to the rear-facing under certain conditions.
child is so great if the airbag
Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a
deploys.
system, if equipped, has turned rear seating position, study the
off the right front passenger instructions that came with the child
{ WARNING frontal airbag, no system is restraint to make sure it is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee compatible with this vehicle.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured that an airbag will not deploy Child restraints and booster seats
or killed if the right front under some unusual vary considerably in size, and some
passenger airbag inflates. This is circumstance, even though it is may fit in certain seating positions
because the back of the turned off. better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints
secured.
be very close to the inflating in a rear seat, even if the airbag
airbag. A child in a forward-facing is off. If you secure a Depending on where you place the
child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in child restraint and the size of the
child restraint you may not be able
(Continued) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for vehicle. This system is designed to Not all vehicle seating positions or
additional passengers or child make installation of a child restraint child restraints have lower anchors
restraints. Adjacent seating easier. and attachments or top tether
positions should not be used if the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible anchors and attachments.
child restraint prevents access to or child restraint is properly installed
interferes with the routing of the Lower Anchors
using the anchors, or use the
safety belt. vehicle's safety belts to secure the
Wherever a child restraint is restraint, following the instructions
installed, be sure to secure the child that came with that restraint, and
restraint properly. also the instructions in this manual.
Keep in mind that an unsecured When installing a child restraint with
child restraint can move around in a a top tether, you must also use
collision or sudden stop and injure either the lower anchors or the
people in the vehicle. Be sure to safety belts to properly secure the
properly secure any child restraint in child restraint. A child restraint must
the vehicle even when no child is never be installed using only the top
in it. tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
Lower Anchors and the vehicle, you need a child Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
restraint that has LATCH
Tethers for Children attachments. The child restraint
built into the vehicle. There are two
(LATCH System) lower anchors for each LATCH
manufacturer will provide you with seating position that will
The LATCH system secures a child instructions on how to use the child accommodate a child restraint with
restraint during driving or in a crash. restraint and its attachments. The lower attachments (2).
LATCH attachments on the child following explains how to attach a
restraint are used to attach the child child restraint with these
restraint to the anchors in the attachments in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. Be
sure to read and follow the
instructions for the child restraint.
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of Rear Seat

the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into the I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors.
attachment (2) on the child restraint H (Lower Anchor): Seating
connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors.
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH
System
{ WARNING
To assist in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with If a LATCH-type child restraint is
lower anchors has two labels, near not attached to anchors, the child
the crease between the seatback restraint will not be able to protect
and the seat cushion. the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint properly using the
position without a top tether anchor anchors, or use the vehicle safety
if a national or local law requires belts to secure the restraint,
that the top tether be attached, or if following the instructions that
the instructions that come with the came with the child restraint and
To assist in locating the top tether child restraint say that the top tether the instructions in this manual.
anchors, the top tether anchor must be attached.
symbol is near the top tether According to accident statistics,
anchors. children and infants are safer when
The top tether anchors are on the properly restrained in a child { WARNING
back of the rear seatback. Be sure restraint system or infant restraint
Do not attach more than one child
to use an anchor on the same side system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the restraint to a single anchor.
of the vehicle as the seating Attaching more than one child
position where the child restraint will Restraint on page 337 for
be placed. additional information. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1. Attach and tighten the lower
WARNING (Continued) attachments rub against the attachments to the lower
vehicles safety belts. This may anchors. If the child restraint
restraint to a single anchor could damage these parts. If necessary, does not have lower
cause the anchor or attachment move buckled safety belts to attachments or the desired
to come loose or even break avoid rubbing the LATCH seating position does not have
during a crash. A child or others attachments. lower anchors, secure the child
could be injured. To reduce the restraint with the top tether and
risk of serious or fatal injuries Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This the safety belts. Refer to the
during a crash, attach only one child restraint manufacturer
could damage the safety belt or
child restraint per anchor. instructions and the instructions
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position, in this manual.
before folding the seat. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
{ WARNING If you need to secure more than one the desired seating
position.
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Children can be seriously injured Where to Put the Restraint on 1.2. Put the child restraint on
or strangled if a shoulder belt is page 337. the seat.
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to This system is designed to make 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
the installation of child restraints attachments on the child
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
easier. When using lower anchors, restraint to the lower
belts behind the child restraint so
do not use the vehicle's safety belts. anchors.
children cannot reach them. Pull Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
the shoulder belt all the way out and child restraint attachments to
of the retractor to set the lock, secure the restraints. Some
if the vehicle has one, after the restraints also use another vehicle
child restraint has been installed. anchor to secure a top tether.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. If the child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using

recommends that the top tether does not have a headrest
be attached, attach and tighten or head restraint and you
the top tether to the top tether are using a single tether,
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the route the tether over the
child restraint instructions and seatback.
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten If the position you are using
the top tether according to has an adjustable headrest
the child restraint or head restraint and you
instructions and the are using a dual tether,
following instructions: route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint .
If the position you are using

does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the position you are using Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat)
are using a single tether, When securing a child restraint in a
raise the headrest or head { WARNING rear seating position, study the
restraint and route the instructions that came with the child
tether under the headrest or A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is
head restraint and in system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
between the headrest or LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH
head restraint posts.
resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
3. Before placing a child in the Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
child restraint, make sure it is System) on page 339 for how and
securely held in place. To check, sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint
grasp the child restraint at the working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
LATCH path and attempt to see your dealer to have the secured in the vehicle using a
move it side to side and back system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
and forth. There should be no necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
movement, for proper page 339 for top tether anchor
installation. If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
may be needed. if a national or local law requires
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the child restraint does not have

the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 337.
1. Put the child restraint on 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
the seat. buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run set, the belt can be tightened but
the lap and shoulder portions of the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child necessary.
restraint instructions will show
you how.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat
tether. See Lower Anchors and is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 339 for more Where to Put the Restraint on
information. page 337.
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle may have a
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which is
securely held in place. To check, designed to turn off the right front
grasp the child restraint at the passenger frontal airbag and
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to seat-mounted side impact airbag
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back under certain conditions. See
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child Passenger Sensing System (United
tighten the lap portion of the belt restraint is properly installed, States) on page 325 and
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. (United States) on page 512 for
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, more information, including
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and important safety information.
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position. A label on the sun visor says,
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top Never put a rear-facing child seat in
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it. the front. This is because the risk to
retractor to make sure the the rear-facing child is so great,
retractor is locked. If the if the airbag deploys.
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the child restraint has the LATCH

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints System) on page 339 for how and
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag where to install the child restraint
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a using LATCH. If a child restraint is
passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in secured using a safety belt and it
because the back of the the right front seat, always move uses a top tether, see Lower
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far Anchors and Tethers for Children
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to (LATCH System) on page 339 for
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a top tether anchor locations.
child restraint can be seriously rear seat. Do not secure a child seat in a
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System position without a top tether anchor
passenger airbag inflates and the (United States) on page 325 for if a national or local law requires
passenger seat is in a forward additional information. that the top tether be anchored, or if
position. the instructions that come with the
Even if the passenger sensing child restraint say that the top strap
If the vehicle does not have a rear must be anchored.
system has turned off the right seat that will accommodate a
front passenger frontal airbag, no rear-facing child restraint, a
system is fail-safe. No one can rear-facing child restraint should not
guarantee that an airbag will not be installed in the vehicle, even if
deploy under some unusual the airbag is off.
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of
this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through
that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child
1. Move the seat as far back as it restraint instructions will show
will go before securing the you how.
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
airbag status indicator should out of the retractor to set the
light and stay lit when the lock. When the retractor lock is
vehicle is started. See set, the belt can be tightened but
Passenger Airbag Status not pulled out of the retractor.
Indicator (United States) on
page 512.
4. Push the latch plate into the
2. Put the child restraint on buckle until it clicks.
the seat.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed
rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see If the
has a top tether, follow the child On Indicator is Lit for a Child
restraint manufacturer's Restraint under Passenger Sensing
instructions regarding the use of System (United States) on
the top tether. See Lower page 325 for more information.
Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint,
Children (LATCH System) on unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
page 339 for more information. let it return to the stowed position.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
tighten the lap portion of the belt and forth. When the child
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
to push down on the child the passenger airbag status
restraint as you tighten the belt. indicator, if equipped, will come on
Try to pull the belt out of the and stay on when the vehicle is
retractor to make sure the started.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Front Storage

Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 The vehicle has a storage area to
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 the left of the steering wheel. Pull
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 down on the handle to access.
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 Glove Box
Additional Storage Features To open the glove box, lift up on the
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 lever. If the glove box has a lock,
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 use the key to lock and unlock it.
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 For vehicles with a storage area
Cupholders located under the front passenger
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
There are cupholders in the center seat, lift up on the end of the tray
Roof Rack System console and in the second row seat and pull it forward to access it.
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 armrest.
Pull down the armrest to access the Sunglasses Storage
cupholders. This vehicle may have a sunglasses
storage compartment near the
rearview mirror. Push the cover
to open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage Cargo Tie-Downs

Features Four cargo tiedowns are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle.
The tie-downs can be used to
Cargo Cover secure small loads.
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
it to cover items in the rear of the Cargo Management
vehicle.
System
To remove the cover and remove it
from the vehicle, pull both ends If the vehicle has a cargo
toward each other. To reinstall, management system in the rear of
place each end of the cover in the the vehicle, it will have rails with
holes behind the rear seat. adapters and hooks. These are
used to hold the net and mesh
This vehicle has a center console pocket.
with an upper and lower storage
area. To access the upper storage
area pull on the latch to lift the
armrest. Slide the cupholder back to
access a larger storage area
underneath.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Storage 4-3
Convenience Net Roof Rack System

For vehicles with a convenience net,
located in the rear, use it to store { WARNING
small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be If something is carried on top of
used to store heavy loads. the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress the
wind can catch it while the vehicle
is being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
The adapters are used to hold the and damage the vehicle. Never
net. Slide the adapters to the
carry something longer or wider
desired location on the upper and
than the roof rack on top of the
lower rail and turn the handle up to
lock it in place. Compress the rods vehicle unless using a GM
of the net and insert them into the certified accessory carrier.
corresponding openings of the
adapter. The longer rod is for the For vehicles with a roof rack, the
upper adapter. rack can be used to load items. For
The hooks hold the mesh pocket. To roof racks that do not have
insert a hook on the rail, place the crossrails included, GM Certified
hook in the upper groove of the rail crossrails can be purchased as an
and press it into the lower groove. accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4 Storage
Notice: Loading cargo on the Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

roof rack that weighs more than capacity when loading the vehicle.
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the For more information on vehicle
rear or sides of the vehicle may capacity and loading, see Vehicle
damage the vehicle. Load cargo Load Limits on page 910.
so that it rests evenly between Check that all cargo is securely
the crossrails, making sure to fastened to prevent damage or loss
fasten cargo securely. while driving.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicles center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Airbag Status
Reduced Engine Power
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Controls Indicator (United States) . . . . 5-12
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
Malfunction Low Washer Fluid Warning
Controls Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Service Vehicle Soon Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Warning Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Electric Parking Brake Information Displays
Rear Window Wiper/ Driver Information
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Power Steering Warning Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-29
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Cooling System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Coolant Temperature Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-31
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-32
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Object Detection System Controls 4. Pull the lever up to lock the

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 steering wheel in place.
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-33 Adjustment
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-34
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Steering Wheel Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-36
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-41
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull For vehicles with audio steering
the lever down. wheel controls, some audio controls
2. Move the steering wheel up can be adjusted at the steering
or down. wheel.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel + / (Next/Previous): Press and
closer or away from you. release to go to the next or the
previous preset radio station or CD
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
track.
J / 0 (Call/Mute): For vehicles with Windshield Wiper/Washer 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):

Bluetooth and OnStar, press to Sets a delay between wipes. Move
interact with those systems. See the switch on top of the lever left for
Bluetooth on page 723 or OnStar less frequent wipes or right for more
Overview on page 141 for more frequent wipes.
information. Press and release to a (Low): Slow wipes.
mute the system. Press it again to
turn the sound back on. 1 (High): Fast wipes.
K (End Call): Press to reject an Clear ice and snow from the wiper
incoming call, or end a current call. blades before using them. If frozen
Press to silence the vehicle to the windshield, carefully loosen or
speakers while using the thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
infotainment system. Press again to should be replaced. See Wiper
turn the sound on. Blade Replacement on page 1025.
v + or v (Volume): Move the The windshield wiper lever is on the Heavy snow or ice can overload the
thumbwheel up or down to increase right side of the steering column. wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
or to decrease the volume. stop the motor until it cools down.
Move the lever up or down to select
the wiper speed. Rainsense
Horn 8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly move Notice: Going through an
Press a on the steering wheel pad the lever down. The lever returns to automatic car wash with the
to sound the horn. its starting position when released. wipers on can damage them. Turn
For several wipes, hold the the wipers off when going
lever down. through an automatic car wash.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield
wipers off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For vehicles with Rainsense The wipers can be left in a Rear Window Wiper/
windshield wipers, the moisture Rainsense mode even when it is not
sensor is next to the inside rearview raining.
Washer
mirror and is mounted on the When Rainsense is active, the The rear wiper and rear wash button
windshield. When active, these headlamps turn on automatically if is on the instrument panel above the
sensors are able to detect moisture the exterior lamp control is in the climate control system.
on the windshield and automatically
turn on the wipers.
AUTO position and the wipers are = (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press to
active. wash and wipe the rear window.
To turn on the Rainsense feature,
Windshield Washer The rear window washer uses the
the wipers must be set to one of the
same reservoir as the windshield
five delay settings on the lever.
Each of the five settings adjusts the { WARNING washer. Check the windshield
washer reservoir level if the front
sensitivity of the sensor.
In freezing weather, do not use windshield can be worked, but no
Since different drivers have different the washer until the windshield is fluid is sprayed when the rear
setting preferences, it is warmed. Otherwise the washer washer is activated. See Washer
recommended that the mid-range Fluid on page 1020.
fluid can form ice on the
setting (position 3) be used initially.
For more wipes, select the higher
windshield, blocking your vision. 5 (Delay): Press to turn the
delayed wiping on or off.
settings; for fewer wipes, select the
lower settings located closer to the Pull the windshield wiper lever to
off position on the lever. spray windshield washer fluid and Compass
The sensor automatically controls activate the wipers. The wipers will The vehicle may have a compass in
the frequency of the wipes from the continue until the lever is released the Driver Information Center (DIC).
off setting to the high speed setting or the maximum wash time is
according to the weather conditions. reached.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Compass Zone To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current
The zone is set to Zone 8 upon the following procedure: location and variance zone
leaving the factory. Your dealer will number on the map.
Compass Variance (Zone)
set the correct zone for your Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are
location. available.
1. Do not set the compass zone
Under certain circumstances, such when the vehicle is moving. Only 3. Press and hold the set/reset
as during a long distance set it when the vehicle is in button to scroll through and
cross-country trip or moving to a P (Park). select the appropriate
new state or province, it will be variance zone.
Press the vehicle information
necessary to compensate for 4. Press the trip/fuel button until
compass variance by resetting the button until PRESS V TO SET
COMPASS ZONE: ## displays. the vehicle heading, for
zone through the DIC if the zone is example, N for North, is
not set correctly. displayed in the DIC.
Compass variance is the difference 5. If calibration is necessary,
between the earth's magnetic north calibrate the compass. See
and true geographic north. If the Compass Calibration
compass is not set to the zone Procedure following.
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass Compass Calibration
must be set to the variance zone in The compass can be manually
which the vehicle is traveling. calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
It is suggested to calibrate away To calibrate the compass, use the display COMPASS
from tall buildings, utility wires, following procedure: CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
manhole covers, or other industrial few seconds when the
structures, if possible. Compass Calibration Procedure calibration is complete. The DIC
If CAL should ever appear in the 1. Before calibrating the compass, display will then return to the
DIC display, the compass should be make sure the compass is set to previous menu.
calibrated. the variance zone in which the
vehicle is located. See Clock
If the DIC display does not show a Compass Variance (Zone)
heading, for example, N for North, Procedure earlier in this To set the time and date:
or the heading does not change section. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
after making turns, there may be a ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
strong magnetic field interfering with Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof, Press O to turn the radio on.
the compass. Such interference
climate controls, seats, etc.
may be caused by a magnetic CB or
during the calibration procedure. 2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
cell phone antenna mount, a and YYYY (hour, minute, month,
magnetic emergency light, magnetic 2. Press the vehicle information day, and year) display.
note pad holder, or any other button until PRESS V TO
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, 3. Press the softkey below any one
CALIBRATE COMPASS of the tabs to be changed.
move the magnetic item, then turn displays.
on the vehicle and calibrate the 4. To increase the time or date do
compass. 3. Press the set/reset button to one of the following:
start the compass calibration.
. Press the softkey below the
4. The DIC will display selected tab.
CALIBRATING COMPASS:
TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive the . Press SEEK, or \ FWD.
vehicle in tight circles at less
than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
. Turn f clockwise.
the calibration.
I
nfor
mat
i The
onPr
ovi DIC
dedby: will
5. To decrease the time or date do 3. Press H again to apply the Certain electrical accessories may
one of the following: selected default, or let the not be compatible with the
screen time out. accessory power outlet and could
. Press SEEK or s REV. overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
. Turn f counterclockwise. Power Outlets If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
The date does not automatically The accessory power outlets can be
When adding electrical equipment,
display. To see the date press H used to plug in electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
while the radio is on. The date with such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
instructions included with the
display times out after a few The power outlets are inside the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
seconds and goes back to the center floor console, on the rear of Equipment on page 945.
normal radio and time display. the center floor console, and in the
Notice: Hanging heavy
To change the time default setting rear cargo compartment.
equipment from the power outlet
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to The power outlet located in the rear can cause damage not covered
change the date default setting from cargo area is powered at all times. by the vehicle warranty. The
month/day/year to day/month/year: power outlets are designed for
Remove the cover to access and
1. Press H and then the softkey replace when not in use. accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
below the forward arrow label to Notice: Leaving electrical
select the time 12H and 24H, equipment plugged in for an
and the date MM/DD/YYYY extended period of time while the
(month, day, and year) and DD/ vehicle is off will drain the
MM/YYYY (day, month, and battery. Always unplug electrical
year) display. equipment when not in use and
2. Press the softkey below the do not plug in equipment that
desired option. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument Cluster
English Cluster Shown, Metric Cluster Similar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Speedometer Cycle between the odometer and Fuel Gauge

trip odometers A and B by pressing
The speedometer shows the the reset button located in the lower
vehicle's speed in either kilometers right area of the speedometer. Press
per hour (km/h) or miles per the reset button to tell how many
hour (mph). miles or kilometers have been
recorded on either Trip A or Trip B
Odometer since the trip odometer was last set
The odometer shows how far the back to zero.
vehicle has been driven, in either To reset each trip odometer to zero,
kilometers or miles. press and hold the reset button. The
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant reset button resets only the trip
odometer. If the vehicle needs a odometer that is being displayed.
new odometer installed, the new Each trip odometer must be reset
individually. Metric
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the Tachometer
driver door to show the old mileage The tachometer displays the engine
reading. speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the
number of miles, or kilometers,
traveled for up to two trips.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
English
When the ignition is on, the fuel took a little more or less than
gauge indicates how much fuel is half the tank's capacity to fill
left in the tank. the tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the . The gauge moves a little while
low fuel light comes on. There is still turning a corner or speeding up.
a little fuel left, but the fuel tank . The gauge takes a few seconds
should be refilled soon. See Low When the vehicle is started this light
to stabilize after the ignition is
Fuel Warning Light on page 521 for flashes and a chime may come on
turned on, but it goes back to
more information. to remind the driver to fasten their
empty when the ignition is
safety belt. Then the light stays on
An arrow on the fuel gauge turned off.
solid until the belt is buckled. This
indicates the side of the vehicle the For fuel tank capacity, see cycle may continue several times if
fuel door is on. Capacities and Specifications on the driver remains or becomes
Here are four things that some page 122. unbuckled while the vehicle is
owners ask about. None of these moving.
means the fuel gauge is not working Safety Belt Reminders If the driver safety belt is buckled,
properly:
Driver Safety Belt Reminder neither the light nor the chime
. At the service station, the fuel comes on.
pump shuts off before the gauge
Light
reads full. There is a driver safety belt Passenger Safety Belt
reminder light on the instrument Reminder Light
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge cluster. There may be a passenger safety
indicated. For example, the belt reminder light near the
gauge may have indicated the passenger airbag status indicator.
tank was half full, but it actually See Passenger Sensing System
(United States) on page 325.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
and/or chime, remove the object

from the seat or buckle the { WARNING
safety belt.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
Airbag Readiness Light comes on while driving, it means
This light shows if there is an the airbag system might not be
For vehicles equipped with the electrical problem with the airbag working properly. The airbags in
passenger safety belt warning light, system. The system check includes the vehicle might not inflate in a
when the vehicle is started this light the airbag sensor(s), passenger
flashes and a chime may come on crash, or they could even inflate
sensing system, the pretensioners, without a crash. To help avoid
to remind passengers to fasten their the airbag modules, the wiring, and
safety belt. Then the light stays on injury, have the vehicle serviced
the crash sensing and diagnostic right away.
solid until the belt is buckled. This module. For more information on the
cycle continues several times if the airbag system, see Airbag System
passenger remains or becomes on page 317. If there is a problem with the airbag
unbuckled while the vehicle is system, a Driver Information Center
moving. (DIC) message may also come on.
If the passenger safety belt is See Airbag System Messages on
buckled, neither the chime nor the page 533.
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on Indicator (United States)
if an object is put on the seat such The airbag readiness light comes on
The vehicle has the passenger
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery for several seconds when the
sensing system. See Passenger
bag, laptop, or other electronic vehicle is started. If the light does
Sensing System (United States) on
device. To turn off the warning light not come on then, have it fixed
page 325 for important safety
immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
information. The instrument panel If the word OFF is lit on the airbag Charging System Light
has a passenger airbag status status indicator, it means that the
indicator. passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the The charging system light comes on
passenger sensing system. See briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the your dealer for service. on, but the engine is not running, as
passenger airbag status indicator a check to show the light is working.
will light the words ON and OFF, for
several seconds as a system check.
{ WARNING The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
If you are using remote start, If the airbag readiness light ever vehicle serviced by your dealer.
if equipped, to start the vehicle from comes on and stays on, it means
a distance, you may not see the If the light stays on, or comes on
that something may be wrong
system check. Then, after several while driving, there could be a
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
more seconds, the status indicator avoid injury to yourself or others,
will light either the word ON or the system. Have it checked by your
have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on
word OFF, to let you know the
away. See Airbag Readiness could drain the battery.
status of the right front passenger
Light on page 512 for more
frontal airbag. If a short distance must be driven
information, including important
If the word ON is lit on the with the light on, be sure to turn off
safety information.
passenger airbag status indicator, it all accessories, such as the radio
means that the right front passenger and air conditioner.
frontal airbag is enabled (may
inflate). I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by costly repairs not covered by the
the system before any problem is vehicle warranty. This could also
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light result in a failure to pass a
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage required Emission Inspection/
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system also Maintenance test. See
Generation) monitors the operation assists the service technician in Accessories and Modifications on
of the vehicle to ensure emissions correctly diagnosing any page 102.
are at acceptable levels, helping to malfunction. This light comes on during a
maintain a clean environment. The Notice: If the vehicle is malfunction in one of two ways:
malfunction indicator lamp comes continually driven with this light
on when the vehicle is placed in Light Flashing: A misfire condition
on, the emission controls might has been detected. A misfire
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is not work as well, the vehicle fuel
working. If it does not, have the increases vehicle emissions and
economy might not be as good, could damage the emission control
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See and the engine might not run as
Ignition Positions on page 914. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
smoothly. This could lead to and service might be required.
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
intake, or fuel system of the . Avoid hard accelerations.
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the malfunction indicator lamp those of the same Tire
comes on while the engine is
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled as
running, this indicates that the affect the vehicle's emission
OBD II system has detected a soon as it is possible.
controls and can cause this light
problem and diagnosis and service to come on. Modifications to
might be required. these systems could lead
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: to
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
emission control system
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
page 935.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument
page 937. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and is needed.
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems The vehicle may not pass
missing fuel cap allows fuel to inspection if:
evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.
A few driving trips with the cap . The malfunction indicator lamp is
properly installed should turn the on with the engine running, or if
light off. the light does not come on when
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Service Vehicle Soon

while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp.
. The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines Metric English
that critical emission control
The brake indicator light should
systems have not been
come on briefly as the engine is
completely diagnosed. The
The service vehicle soon light started. If it does not come on have
vehicle would be considered not
comes on if a condition exists that the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has may require the vehicle to be taken When the ignition is on, the brake
recently been replaced or run in for service. system warning light may also come
down. The diagnostic system is If the light comes on, take the on when the parking brake is set.
designed to evaluate critical vehicle to your dealer for service as The light stays on if the parking
emission control systems during soon as possible. brake does not fully release. If it
normal driving. This can take stays on after the parking brake is
several days of routine driving. Brake System Warning fully released, there is a brake
If this has been done and the problem. Have the brake system
vehicle still does not pass the
Light inspected immediately.
inspection for lack of OBD II The vehicle brake system consists
system readiness, your dealer of two hydraulic circuits. If one
can prepare the vehicle for circuit is not working, the remaining
inspection. circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Electric Parking Brake

{ WARNING Light
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
The parking brake warning light
warning light on can lead to a
should come on briefly when ignition
crash. If the light is still on after
is placed in ON/RUN. If it does not
the vehicle has been pulled off come on then, have it fixed so it will
the road and carefully stopped, The parking brake status light be ready to warn if there is a
have the vehicle towed for comes on when the brake is problem.
service. applied. If the light continues
flashing after the parking brake is If this light comes on, there is a
released, or while driving, there is a problem with a system on the
If the light comes on while driving, a problem with the EPB system. vehicle that is causing the EPB
chime sounds. Pull off the road and A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE system to work at a reduced level.
stop. The pedal might be harder to message may also display in the The vehicle can still be driven, but
push or go closer to the floor. Driver Information Center (DIC). should be taken to a dealer as soon
It might also take longer to stop. See Brake System Messages on as possible. See Parking Brake on
If the light is still on, have the page 528 for more information. page 925.
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 1069. If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Antilock Brake System If the ABS warning light remains on For vehicles with the
after resetting the system or comes All-Wheel-Drive light, it comes on
(ABS) Warning Light on again while driving, the vehicle briefly when the ignition is turned to
needs service. If the ABS warning ON/RUN.
light is on, but the regular brake If it does not, have the vehicle
system warning light is not on, the serviced by your dealer. If the
antilock brakes are not working system is working normally, the
properly, but the regular brakes are indicator light then goes off.
still functioning. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. If both brake This light comes on when there is a
This light should come on briefly lights are on, the vehicle does not malfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it have antilock brakes, and there is a (AWD) system.
does not come on, have the vehicle problem with the regular brakes as This light flashes when the AWD
serviced by your dealer. well. Have the vehicle towed for system is temporarily disabled.
If the ABS warning light stays on service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 1069. For more information see All-Wheel
longer than a few seconds after the Drive on page 924.
vehicle is in ON/RUN, or comes on
and stays on while driving, try All-Wheel-Drive Light This light comes on when the
resetting the system. To reset the compact spare tire is installed. See
system: Compact Spare Tire on page 1064
for more information.
1. While driving, pull over when it is
safe to do so.
2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
3. Turn the vehicle off.
4. Restart the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Steering Warning StabiliTrak Indicator Traction Control System

Light Light (TCS) Warning Light
This light comes on briefly when the The StabiliTrak light comes on This light comes on briefly as the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a briefly as the engine is started. If it engine is started. If it does not come
check to show it is working. does not come on, have the vehicle on, have the vehicle serviced by
If it does not come on have the serviced by your dealer. your dealer.
vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light flashes while the It also comes on when the Traction
If this light stays on, or comes on StabiliTrak system or the Traction Control System (TCS) has been
while driving, the system may not be Control System (TCS) is working. turned off. See Traction Control
working. If this happens, see your The light comes on when there is a System (TCS) on page 927 and
dealer for service. problem with the StabiliTrak system. StabiliTrak System on page 928
See Traction Control System (TCS) for more information.
on page 927 and StabiliTrak
System on page 928 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Coolant Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
Temperature Warning
Light If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
The engine coolant temperature problem with the TPMS. If the
light should come on briefly as the problem is not corrected, the light
engine is started. If it does not come will come on at every ignition cycle.
on have the vehicle serviced by See Tire Pressure Monitor
your dealer. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 1046.
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is Fuel Economy Light
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
Notice: The engine coolant the tires are significantly
temperature warning light underinflated.
indicates that the vehicle has
A Driver Information Center (DIC) For vehicles with the fuel economy
overheated. Driving with this light
tire pressure message may also mode, this light comes on when the
on can damage the engine and it
display. See Tire Messages on eco (economy) button, located on
may not be covered by the
page 534. Stop as soon as the center console near the shift
vehicle warranty. See Engine
possible, and inflate the tires to the lever, is pressed. Press the button
Overheating on page 1018.
pressure value shown on the Tire again to turn off the light and exit
If this light comes on and stays on, and Loading Information label. See the fuel economy mode.
the engine has overheated. Pull Tire Pressure on page 1043. See Fuel Economy Mode on
over and see Engine Overheating
on page 1018 for more information. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Low Fuel Warning Light indicator light turns off. If it does not Reduced Engine Power
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Light
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system.
This light is also used to indicate the
The low fuel warning light comes on status of the anti-theft alarm system
briefly when the vehicle is started. when the ignition is turned off. The The reduced engine power light
This light also comes on when the light will flash rapidly if the alarm should come on briefly as the
fuel level is low. When fuel is added, system is arming and one or more engine is started. If it does not come
the light should go off. If it does not, of the monitored entry points is not on, have the vehicle serviced by
have the vehicle serviced. closed. The light will stay on if the your dealer.
alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed. This light, along with the malfunction
Security Light indicator lamp, displays when a
For information regarding this light noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
and the vehicle's security system, performance occurs. Stop the
see Vehicle Alarm System on vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait
page 29. 10 seconds and restart the vehicle.
This might correct the condition.
The vehicle can be driven at a
reduced speed when the reduced
The security light should come on engine power light is on but
briefly as the engine is started. If the acceleration and speed might be
system is working normally, the reduced. The performance could be
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays The fog lamp light comes on when Cruise Control Light
on, see your dealer as soon as the fog lamps are in use.
possible for diagnosis and repair. The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
High-Beam On Light Lamps on page 64 for more
information.
Low Washer Fluid

Warning Light The cruise control light comes on
whenever the cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
The high-beam on light comes on
Control on page 929 for more
when the high-beam headlamps are
information.
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Door Ajar Light
Changer on page 62 for more The low washer fluid warning light
information. comes on when the windshield
washer fluid is low. See Washer
Front Fog Lamp Light Fluid on page 1020 for more
information.
This light comes on when a door is

open or not securely latched. Before
driving, check that all doors are
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
properly closed.
Gate Ajar Light Information Displays vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If an abnormal temperature reading
is displayed for an extended period
Driver Information of time, consult your dealer. Under
Center (DIC) certain circumstances, especially
when the engine is idling, a delay in
The vehicle has a Driver Information
updating the temperature display is
Center (DIC).
normal.
All information appears in the DIC
If the gate ajar light comes on, the See Compass on page 54 and
display in the instrument cluster.
liftgate is not completely closed. Automatic Transmission on
Driving with the liftgate open can The DIC comes on when the ignition page 920.
cause carbon monoxide (CO) to is on. After a short delay, the DIC
The DIC has different displays
enter the vehicle. displays the information that was
which can be accessed by pressing
last displayed before the engine
See Engine Exhaust on page 919 the DIC buttons on the instrument
was turned off.
for more information. panel, below the exterior lamps
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and control.
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system DIC Buttons
problem is detected.
The DIC also displays the compass
direction, outside air temperature,
and shift position indicator at the top
of the DIC display. If there is a
problem with the system that
controls the temperature display, the
numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle U (Customization): Press this Trip Odometer
information, customization, and set/ button to customize the feature
reset buttons. The button functions Press 3 until TRIP A or TRIP B
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
are detailed in the following pages. displays. This display shows the
Personalization on page 536 for
current distance traveled in either
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button more information.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since
to display the odometer, trip V (Set/Reset): Press this button to the last reset for the trip odometer.
odometer, fuel range, average set or reset certain functions and to Pressing the trip odometer reset
economy, fuel used, and elapsed turn off or acknowledge messages stem will also display the trip
time. Some vehicles also display on the DIC. odometer.
instantaneous economy. The
compass and outside temperature Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to
will also be shown in the display. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button zero separately by pressing V while
The temperature will be shown to scroll through the following menu the trip odometer is displayed. You
in C or F depending on the units items: can also reset the trip odometer
selected. while it is displayed by pressing and
Odometer holding the trip odometer
T (Vehicle Information): Press reset stem.
this button to display the oil life, rear Press 3 until ODOMETER
park assist, units, tire pressure displays. This display shows the Fuel Range
readings and tire pressure sensor distance the vehicle has been
learning for vehicles with the Tire driven in either kilometers (km) or Press 3 until RANGE displays.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), miles (mi). Pressing the trip This display shows the approximate
compass zone setting, compass odometer reset stem will also number of remaining kilometers (km)
recalibration on vehicles with this display the odometer. or miles (mi) the vehicle can be
feature, coolant temperature, and driven without refueling. This display
battery voltage. To switch between metric and will show LOW if the fuel level
English measurements, see Units is low.
later in this section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The fuel range estimate is based on Average Fuel Economy Elapsed Time
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history Press 3 until AVERAGE FUEL Press 3 until ELAPSED TIME
and the amount of fuel remaining in ECONOMY displays. This display displays. This display can be used
the fuel tank. This estimate will shows the approximate average as a timer.
change if driving conditions change. liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) To start the timer, press the set/
For example, if driving in traffic and or kilometers per liter (km/L) or reset button while ELAPSED TIME
making frequent stops, this display miles per gallon (mpg). This number is displayed. The display will show
may read one number, but if the is calculated based on the number the amount of time that has passed
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the of L/100 km (km/L) (mpg) recorded since the timer was last reset, not
number may change even though since the last time this menu item including time the ignition is off.
the same amount of fuel is in the was reset. To reset the AVERAGE Time will continue to be counted as
fuel tank. This is because different FUEL ECONOMY, press and long as the ignition is on, even if
driving conditions produce different hold V. The display will show zero. another display is being shown on
fuel economies. Generally, freeway the DIC. The timer will record up to
driving produces better fuel Fuel Used
99 hours, 59 minutes and
economy than city driving. Fuel Press 3 until FUEL USED 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
range cannot be reset. displays. This display shows the the display will return to zero.
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the number of liters (L) or gallons (gal)
To stop the timer, press V briefly
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be of fuel used since the last reset of
this menu item. To reset the fuel while ELAPSED TIME is displayed.
displayed. See FUEL LEVEL LOW
under Fuel System Messages on used information, press and hold V To reset the timer to zero, press and
page 531. while FUEL USED is displayed. hold V while ELAPSED TIME is
displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instantaneous Fuel Economy remaining useful life. If you see is shown. When the system is reset,
If the vehicle has this display, 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the the display will show 100% OIL LIFE
display, that means 99% of the REMAINING.
press 3 until INSTANT FUEL current oil life remains. The engine
ECONOMY displays. This display oil life system will alert you to Park Assist
shows the current fuel economy at a change the oil on a schedule If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
particular moment and will change consistent with the driving Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
frequently as driving conditions conditions. press T until PARK ASSIST
change. This display shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in liters When the remaining oil life is low, displays. This display allows the
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON system to be turned on or off. Once
miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike message will appear on the display. in this display, press V to select
average fuel economy, this display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON between ON or OFF. The URPA
cannot be reset. under Engine Oil Messages on system automatically turns back on
page 530. You should change the after each vehicle start. When the
Blank Display oil as soon as you can. See Engine URPA system is turned off and the
This display shows no information. Oil on page 108. In addition to the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
engine oil life system monitoring the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
Vehicle Information Menu oil life, additional maintenance is OFF message as a reminder that
Items recommended in the Maintenance the system has been turned off. See
Schedule in this manual. See Object Detection System Messages
T (Vehicle Information): Press Maintenance Schedule on
this button to scroll through the on page 532 and Ultrasonic
page 113 for more information. Parking Assist on page 931 for
following menu items:
Whenever the oil is changed, the Oil more information.
Oil Life Life System will need to be reset. To
reset the system through the DIC, Units
Press T until OIL LIFE
press and hold V while this display Press T until UNITS displays. This
REMAINING displays. This display
shows an estimate of the oil's display allows you to select between
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: metric or English units of
measurement. Once in this display, Tire Pressure For information on relearning tire
press V to select between METRIC If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure positions see TPMS Sensor
or ENGLISH units. All of the vehicle Monitor System (TPMS), the Matching Process under Tire
information will then be displayed in pressure for each tire can be viewed Pressure Monitor Operation on
the unit of measurement selected. in the DIC. The tire pressure will be page 1046.
Coolant Temperature shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or Compass Zone Setting

pounds per square inch (psi). Press
T until the DIC displays FRONT This display allows for setting the
Press T until the coolant
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## compass zone. See Compass on
temperature is displayed. The page 54 for more information.
temperature will be shown in C RIGHT ##. Press T again until the
or F depending on the units DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa Compass Recalibration
selected. (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. This display allows for calibrating
If the coolant temperature display If a low or high tire pressure the compass. See Compass on
shows dashes instead of a value, condition is detected by the system page 54 for more information.
there may be a problem with the while driving, a message advising Blank Display
vehicle. If this happens often, see you to check the pressure in a
your dealer for service. specific tire will appear in the This display shows no information.
Battery Voltage display. See Tire Pressure on
page 1043 and Tire Messages on
Press T until the battery voltage is page 534 for more information.
displayed. If the tire pressure display shows
If the battery voltage display shows dashes instead of a value, there
dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with the vehicle.
may be a problem with the vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your
If this happens often, see your dealer for service.
dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Messages You will find the possible messages RELEASE PARK BRAKE
that can be displayed and some SWITCH
Messages are displayed on the DIC information about them grouped by
to notify the driver that the status of subject in the following information. For vehicles with the Electric
the vehicle has changed and that Parking Brake, this message
displays if the Park Brake switch is
some action may be needed by the Brake System Messages pulled while the vehicle is moving.
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one PARK BRAKE RELEASED See Parking Brake on page 925 for
after another. more information.
For vehicles with the Electric
Some messages may not require Parking Brake, this message SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
immediate action, but you can press displays when the parking brake This message displays along with
any of the DIC buttons, or the trip has been released from the set the brake system warning light if
odometer reset stem on the position. See Parking Brake on there is a problem with the brake
instrument cluster, to acknowledge page 925 for more information. system or when the brake fluid level
that you received the messages and is low. See Brake System Warning
to clear them from the display. PARK BRAKE SET
Light on page 516. Have the brake
Some messages cannot be cleared For vehicles with the Electric system serviced by your dealer as
from the DIC display because they Parking Brake, this message soon as possible.
are more urgent. These messages displays when the parking brake
require action before they can be has been applied to the set position. SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
cleared. Take any messages that See Parking Brake on page 925 for For vehicles with the Electric
appear on the display seriously and more information. Parking Brake, this message
remember that clearing the displays if a problem is detected
messages will only make the with the electric parking brake
messages disappear, not correct the system. See Parking Brake on
problem. page 925 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STEP ON BRAKE TO Cruise Control Messages This message continues to display

RELEASE PARK BRAKE for two seconds if it has not been
CRUISE SET TO XXX acknowledged when the engine is
For vehicles with the Electric turned off. The message comes
Parking Brake, this message This message will display when the
cruise control is set and it will show back on for two seconds if it has
displays if you try to release the been acknowledged, but the
parking brake without first pressing the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 929 for more condition still exists when the
the brake pedal. See Parking Brake engine is turned off. If the condition
on page 925 for more information. information.
still exists, the message reappears
when the engine is turned on.
Compass Messages Door Ajar Messages
LIFTGATE OPEN
CALIBRATING COMPASS: DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the
TURN IN CIRCLES This message will display when the liftgate is not closed properly. Close
This message displays when driver door is not closed properly. the liftgate completely.
calibrating the compass. Drive the Close the door completely.
vehicle in circles at less than PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
HOOD OPEN
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the This message will display when the
calibration. See Compass on If the vehicle has the remote start passenger doors are not closed
page 54. feature, this message displays properly. Close the door completely.
along with a chime when the hood is
COMPASS CALIBRATION not closed properly. Make sure that
COMPLETE the hood is closed completely. See
This message displays when the Hood on page 103. This message
compass calibration is complete. displays while the ignition is in ON/
See Compass on page 54. RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and
to clear it from the screen.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Cooling System idling speed. See Engine Engine Oil Messages
Overheating on page 1018 for
Messages more information. CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air This message displays when the This message displays when
Conditioning) OFF engine coolant temperature is too service is urgently required. This
This message displays when the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to indicates that the oil life remaining is
engine coolant becomes hotter than idle until it cools down. less than one percent and the oil
the normal operating temperature. cannot work correctly to avoid
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP engine wear or damage. See your
To avoid added strain on a hot ENGINE
engine, the air conditioning dealer. See Engine Oil on page 108
compressor is automatically turned Notice: If you drive the vehicle and Maintenance Schedule on
off. When the coolant temperature while the engine is overheating, page 113.
returns to normal, the A/C operation severe engine damage may Acknowledging this message will
automatically resumes. You can occur. If an overheat warning not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING
continue to drive the vehicle. appears on the instrument cluster display. That must be done at the
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as OIL LIFE screen. See Oil Life
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE soon as possible. Do not increase under Driver Information Center
ENGINE the engine speed above normal (DIC) on page 523 and Engine Oil
Notice: If you drive the vehicle idling speed. See Engine Life System on page 1010.
while the engine is overheating, Overheating on page 1018 for
more information. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning This message displays along with a This message displays when oil life
appears on the instrument cluster continuous chime when the engine remaining is between one and
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as has overheated. Stop and turn the five percent and service is required
soon as possible. Do not increase engine off immediately to avoid for the vehicle. See your dealer. See
the engine speed above normal severe engine damage. See Engine Engine Oil on page 108 and
Overheating on page 1018. Maintenance Schedule on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: page 113.
Acknowledging this message will until the cause of the low oil maximum acceleration and speed
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING pressure is corrected. See Engine may be reduced. Anytime this
display. That must be done at the Oil on page 108 for more message stays on, the vehicle
OIL LIFE screen. See Oil Life information. should be taken to your dealer for
under Driver Information Center This message displays when the service as soon as possible.
(DIC) on page 523 and Engine Oil vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
Life System on page 1010. Fuel System Messages
Stop the vehicle immediately, as
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL engine damage can result from FUEL LEVEL LOW
On some vehicles, this message driving a vehicle with low oil
This message displays when the
displays when the engine oil level pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
may be too low. Check the oil level by your dealer as soon as possible
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
before filling to the recommended when this message is displayed.
Gauge on page 510 and Filling the
level. If the oil is not low and this Tank on page 937 for more
message remains on, take the Engine Power Messages information.
vehicle to your dealer for service.
See Engine Oil on page 108. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays when the This message may display along
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP vehicle's engine power is reduced.
ENGINE with the malfunction indicator lamp
Reduced engine power can affect on the instrument cluster if the
Notice: If you drive the vehicle the vehicle's ability to accelerate. vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
while the engine oil pressure is If this message is on, but there is no properly. See Malfunction Indicator
low, severe engine damage may reduction in performance, proceed Lamp on page 514. Reinstall the
occur. If a low oil pressure to your destination. The fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank
warning appears on the performance may be reduced the on page 937. The diagnostic
instrument cluster and/or DIC, next time the vehicle is driven. The system can determine if the fuel cap
stop the vehicle as soon as vehicle may be driven at a reduced has been left off or improperly
possible. Do not drive the vehicle speed while this message is on, but installed. A loose or missing fuel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the AUTOMATIC LIGHT and clear it from the DIC display.
atmosphere. A few driving trips with CONTROL OFF For more information see Ultrasonic
the cap properly installed should Parking Assist on page 931.
turn this light and message off. This message displays when the
automatic headlamp system has SERVICE PARK ASSIST
been turned off.
Key and Lock Messages This message displays if there is a
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB Object Detection System Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
BATTERY Messages not use this system to help you
This message displays if a Remote park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
PARK ASST (Assist) on page 931 for more information.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
BLOCKED SEE OWNERS See your dealer for service.
battery is low. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. See MANUAL
Battery Replacement under This message displays if there is Ride Control System
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) something interfering with the park Messages
System Operation on page 22. assist system. See Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 931 for SERVICE STABILITRAK
Lamp Messages more information. This message displays if there is a
PARK ASSIST OFF problem with the StabiliTrak
AUTOMATIC LIGHT system. A warning light also
CONTROL ON After the vehicle has been started, appears on the instrument cluster.
This message displays when the this message displays to remind the See StabiliTrak Indicator Light on
automatic headlamp system is driver that the URPA system has page 519. See StabiliTrak System
activated by turning the exterior been turned off. Press the set/reset on page 928 for more information.
lamps control to AUTO. button or the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge this message If this message turns on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
resetting the system by turning the stability enhancement system, you Any of the following conditions may
ignition off and then back on. If this should normally leave StabiliTrak cause the TCS to turn off:
message still stays on or turns back on. However, you should turn . The TCS is turned off by
on again while you are driving, the StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak
vehicle needs service. Have the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow button. See StabiliTrak System
system inspected by your dealer as and you want to rock the vehicle to on page 928 for more
soon as possible. attempt to free it, or if you are information.
driving in extreme off-road
SERVICE TRACTION conditions and require more wheel . The battery is low.
CONTROL spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on . There is a TCS failure. See your
This message displays when the page 99. To turn the StabiliTrak dealer for service.
Traction Control System (TCS) is system on or off, see StabiliTrak
not functioning properly. A warning System on page 928. TRACTION CONTROL ON
light also appears on the instrument TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when the
cluster. See Traction Control System Traction Control System (TCS) turns
(TCS) Warning Light on page 519 This message displays when the on. See StabiliTrak System on
and Traction Control System (TCS) Traction Control System (TCS) turns page 928 for more information.
on page 927 for more information. off. See Traction Control System
Have the TCS serviced by your (TCS) on page 927 for more Airbag System Messages
dealer as soon as possible. information.
This message only displays while SERVICE AIR BAG
STABILITRAK OFF
the ignition is in ON/RUN and This message displays when there
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this disappears after 10 seconds, unless is a problem with the airbag system.
message displays when you turn off it is acknowledged or an urgent Have the vehicle serviced by your
the StabiliTrak, or when the stability warning appears. dealer immediately. See Airbag
control has been automatically Readiness Light on page 512 for
disabled. To limit wheel spin and more information.
realize the full benefits of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service Vehicle Messages pressure message at a time. To Light on page 520. Several
read the other messages that may conditions may cause this message
SERVICE A/C (Air have been sent at the same time, to appear. See Tire Pressure
Conditioning) SYSTEM press the set/reset button. If a tire Monitor Operation on page 1046 for
pressure message appears on the more information. If the warning
This message displays when there
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have comes on and stays on, there may
is a problem detected in the air
the tire pressures checked and set be a problem with the TPMS. See
conditioning system. Have the
to those shown on the Tire and your dealer.
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 1036, Vehicle Load Limits TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
on page 910, and Tire Pressure on On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This message displays when a page 1043. The DIC also shows Monitor System (TPMS), this
non-emissions-related malfunction the tire pressure values. See Driver message displays when the TPMS
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced Information Center (DIC) on is re-learning the tire positions on
by your dealer as soon as possible. page 523. If the tire pressure is low, the vehicle. The tire positions must
the low tire pressure warning light be re-learned after rotating the tires
Tire Messages comes on. See Tire Pressure Light or after replacing a tire or sensor.
on page 520. See Tire Rotation on page 1049,
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitor System on
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure SERVICE TIRE MONITORING page 1045, and Tire Pressure on
Monitor System (TPMS), this SYSTEM page 1043 for more information.
message displays when the On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
pressure in one or more of the Monitor System (TPMS), this
vehicle's tires needs to be checked. message displays if a part on the
This message also displays LEFT TPMS is not working properly. The
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT tire pressure light also flashes and
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate then remains on during the same
which tire needs to be checked. You ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
can receive more than one tire I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Transmission Messages TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

ENGINE Messages
CHANGE TRANSMISSION
FLUID Notice: Do not drive the vehicle
while the transmission fluid is ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
Notice: Use of the incorrect overheating and the transmission WITH CARE
automatic transmission fluid may temperature warning is displayed This message displays when the
damage the vehicle, and the on the instrument cluster and/or outside air temperature is cold
damages may not be covered by DIC, or the transmission can be enough to create icy road
the vehicle warranty. Always use damaged. This could lead to conditions. Adjust your driving
the automatic transmission fluid costly repairs that would not be accordingly.
listed in Recommended Fluids covered by the warranty.
and Lubricants on page 1112. TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays along with a
This message displays when the life chime if the transmission fluid in the This message displays and a chime
of the transmission fluid has expired vehicle gets hot. Driving with the sounds as a reminder to turn off the
and it should be changed. See transmission fluid temperature high turn signal if you drive the vehicle
Maintenance Schedule on can cause damage to the vehicle. for more than about 1.2 km
page 113 and Recommended Stop the vehicle and let it idle to (0.75 mile) with a turn signal on.
Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 allow the transmission to cool. This See Turn and Lane-Change Signals
for the proper fluid and change message clears and the chime on page 63 for more information.
intervals. stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Entering the Feature DISPLAY LANGUAGE

Settings Menu This feature allows you to select the
Personalization language in which the DIC
1. Turn the ignition on and place
The vehicle may have customization the vehicle in P (Park). messages will appear.
capabilities that allow you to
program certain features to one To avoid excessive drain on the Press U until the PRESS V TO
preferred setting. Customization battery, it is recommended that SET DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen
features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off. appears on the DIC display. Press
one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press U to scroll through the
V once to access the settings for
cannot be programmed to a available customizable options. this feature. Then press U to scroll
preferred setting for two different through the following settings:
drivers. Feature Settings Menu Items ENGLISH (default): All messages
All of the customization options may The following are customization will appear in English.
not be available on the vehicle. Only features that allow you to program FRANCAIS: All messages will
the options available will be settings to the vehicle: appear in French.
displayed on the DIC.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH ESPANOL: All messages will
The default settings for the appear in Spanish.
This feature will only display if a
customization features were set
language other than English has PORTUGUESE: All messages will
when the vehicle left the factory, but
been set. This feature allows you to appear in Portuguese.
may have been changed from their
change the language in which the
default state since then. NO CHANGE: No change will be
DIC messages appear to English.
The customization preferences are made to this feature. The current
automatically recalled. Press U until the PRESS V TO setting will remain.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen
To change customization appears on the DIC display. Press To select a setting, press V while
preferences, use the following V once to display all DIC messages the desired setting is displayed on
procedure. in English. InformationProvidedby: the DIC.
AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All of
This feature allows you to select This feature allows you to select the doors will unlock when the key
when the vehicle's doors will whether or not to turn off the is taken out of the ignition.
automatically lock. See Automatic automatic door unlocking feature. ALL DOORS IN PARK (default):
Door Locks on page 26. It also allows you to select which All of the doors will unlock when the
doors and when the doors will vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press U until PRESS V TO SET automatically unlock. See Automatic
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 26. made to this feature. The current
DIC display. Press V once to
Press U until PRESS V TO SET setting will remain.
access the settings for this feature.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on To select a setting, press V while
Then press U to scroll through the
following settings: the DIC display. Press V once to the desired setting is displayed on
access the settings for this feature. the DIC.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
The doors will automatically lock REMOTE DOOR LOCK
when the vehicle is shifted out of following settings:
This feature allows you to select the
P (Park). OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback you will receive
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically unlock. when locking the vehicle with the
will automatically lock when the DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
vehicle speed is above 13 km/h Only the driver door will unlock transmitter. You will not receive
(8 mph) for three seconds. when the key is taken out of the feedback when locking the vehicle
ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors
NO CHANGE: No change will be
are open. See Remote Keyless
made to this feature. The current DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only the
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
setting will remain. driver door will unlock when the
page 22.
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press U until PRESS V TO SET VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: No Then press U to scroll through the
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on change will be made to this feature. following settings:
The current setting will remain.
the DIC display. Press V once to VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exterior
access the settings for this feature. To select a setting, press V while lamps will not flash when you press
Then press U to scroll through the the desired setting is displayed on K on the RKE transmitter.
following settings: the DIC. VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): The
VERIFICATION OFF: There will be REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK exterior lamps will flash when you
no feedback when you press Q on This feature allows you to select the press K on the RKE transmitter.
the RKE transmitter. type of feedback you will receive VERIF NO CHANGE: No change
VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY: when unlocking the vehicle with the will be made to this feature. The
The exterior lamps will flash when Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) current setting will remain.
transmitter. You will not receive
you press Q on the RKE transmitter. feedback when unlocking the To select a setting, press V while
VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: The vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the desired setting is displayed on
horn will sound on the second press the doors are open. See Remote the DIC.
of Q on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
DELAY DOOR LOCK
Operation on page 22.
VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS This feature allows you to select
(default): The exterior lamps will Press U until PRESS V TO SET whether or not the locking of the
flash when you press Q on the RKE REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears vehicle's doors will be delayed.
transmitter, and the horn will sound on the DIC display. Press V once to When locking the doors with the
when Q is pressed again within access the settings for this feature. power door lock switch and a door
is open, this feature will delay
five seconds of the previous
locking the doors until five seconds
command.
after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
delayed locking feature is in use.
The key must be out of the ignition EXIT LIGHTING To select a setting, press V while
for this feature to work. You can This feature allows you to select the the desired setting is displayed on
temporarily override delayed locking amount of time you want the the DIC.
by pressing the power door lock exterior lamps to remain on when it
switch twice or the lock button on APPROACH LIGHTING
is dark enough outside. This
the RKE transmitter twice. See happens after the key is turned from This feature allows you to select
Delayed Locking on page 26. ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. whether or not to have the exterior
Press U until PRESS V TO SET lamps turn on briefly during low light
Press U until PRESS V TO SET periods after unlocking the vehicle
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC using the Remote Keyless Entry
the DIC display. Press V once to display. Press V once to access the (RKE) transmitter.
access the settings for this feature. settings for this feature. Then press
Then press U to scroll through the Press U until PRESS V TO SET
U to scroll through the following APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
following settings: settings:
the DIC display. Press V once to
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not
locking of the vehicle's doors. access the settings for this feature.
turn on.
ON (default): The doors will not 10 SECONDS (default): The following settings:
lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for
door is closed. 10 seconds. OFF: The exterior lamps will not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
NO CHANGE: No change will be 30 SECONDS: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter.
made to this feature. The current will stay on for 30 seconds.
setting will remain. ON (default): If it is dark enough
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will outside, the exterior lamps will turn
To select a setting, press V while stay on for two minutes. on briefly when you unlock the
the desired setting is displayed on NO CHANGE: No change will be vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
the DIC. made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The lamps will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be Press U until PRESS V TO SET
20 seconds or until Q on the RKE set to a loud level. REMOTE START appears on the
transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle NO CHANGE: No change will be DIC display. Press V once to
is no longer off. See Remote made to this feature. The current access the settings for this feature.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System setting will remain. Then press U to scroll through the
Operation on page 22.
There is no default for chime following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be volume. The volume will stay at the
made to this feature. The current OFF: The remote start feature will
last known setting.
setting will remain. be disabled.
To select a setting, press V while ON (default): The remote start
To select a setting, press V while the desired setting is displayed on feature will be enabled.
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be
REMOTE START made to this feature. The current
CHIME VOLUME setting will remain.
If the vehicle has this feature, it
This feature allows you to select the allows you to turn the remote start To select a setting, press V while
volume level of the chime. off or on. The remote start feature the desired setting is displayed on
allows you to start the engine from
Press U until PRESS V TO SET the DIC.
outside of the vehicle using the
CHIME VOLUME appears on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FACTORY SETTINGS
DIC display. Press V once to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle This feature allows you to set all of
access the settings for this feature. Start on page 24. the customization features back to
Then press U to scroll through the their factory default settings.
following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press U until PRESS V TO If you do not exit, pressing U again Universal Remote
RESTORE DEFAULTS appears on will return you to the beginning of
the DIC display. Press V once to the feature settings menu. System
access the settings for this feature. See Radio Frequency Statement on
Exiting the Feature
Then press U to scroll through the page 1320 for information
Settings Menu regarding Part 15 of the Federal
following settings:
The feature settings menu will be Communications Commission (FCC)
RESTORE (default): The exited when any of the following rules and Industry Canada
customization features will be set to occurs: Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
their factory default settings. . The vehicle is no longer in
NO CHANGE: The customization ON/RUN. Universal Remote System
features will not be set to their Programming
factory default settings. . The 3 or T DIC buttons are
pressed.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on
. The end of the feature settings
the DIC. menu is reached and exited.
. A 40-second time period has
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
elapsed with no selection made.
This feature allows you to exit the
feature settings menu. If the vehicle has this feature, you
will see these buttons with one
Press U until PRESS V TO EXIT
indicator light next to them in the
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in
overhead console.
the DIC display. Press V once to
exit the menu. This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
devices such as garage door When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices:
openers, security systems, and park outside of the garage. Park 1. Hold the end of the hand-held
home automation devices. directly in line with and facing the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
Do not use the Universal Remote garage door opener motor-head or 3 in) away from the Universal
system with any garage door opener gate motor-head. Be sure that Remote system buttons while
that does not have the stop and people and objects are clear of the keeping the indicator light in
reverse feature. This includes any garage door or gate being view. The hand-held transmitter
garage door opener model programmed. was supplied by the
manufactured before April 1,1982. It is recommended that a new manufacturer of the garage door
Read the instructions completely battery be installed in the hand-held opener receiver
before attempting to program the transmitter for quicker and more (motor-head unit).
Universal Remote system. Because accurate transmission of the 2. At the same time, press and
of the steps involved, it may be radio-frequency signal. hold both the hand-held
helpful to have another person Programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the
available to assist with programming Remote System three Universal Remote system
the Universal Remote system. buttons to be used to operate
For questions or help programming the garage door. Do not release
Keep the original hand-held the Universal Remote system, call
transmitter for use in other vehicles the Universal Remote system
1-800-355-3515 or go to button or the hand-held
as well as for future Universal www.homelink.com.
Remote system programming. It is transmitter button until the
also recommended that upon the Programming a garage door opener indicator light changes from a
sale of the vehicle, the programmed involves time-sensitive actions, so slowly to a rapidly flashing light.
Universal Remote system buttons read the entire procedure before You now may release both
be erased for security purposes. starting. Otherwise, the device will buttons.
See Erasing Universal Remote time out and the procedure will have
System Buttons later in this to be repeated.
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Some entry gates and garage

. If the Universal Remote 5. Firmly press and release the
door openers may require system indicator light blinks Learn or Smart button. After
substitution of Step 2 with the rapidly for two seconds, pressing this button, you will
procedure noted in Gate then turns to a constant have 30 seconds to complete
Operator and Canadian light and the garage door Step 6.
Programming later in this does not move, continue
with programming 6. Immediately return to the
section. vehicle. Firmly press and hold
Steps 46.
3. Press and hold for five seconds for two seconds the Universal
the newly trained Universal It may be helpful to have Remote system button, selected
Remote system button (the another person assist with in Step 2 to control the garage
button selected in Step 2) while the remaining Steps 46. door, and then release it. If the
observing the indicator light and garage door does not move or
garage door activation. the lamp on the garage door
. If the indicator light stays on opener receiver (motor-head
continuously or the garage unit) does not flash, press and
door starts to move when hold the same button a second
the Universal Remote time for two seconds, then
system button is pressed release it. Again, if the door
and released, then the does not move or the garage
programming is complete. door lamp does not flash, press
There is no need to Learn or Smart Button and hold the same button a third
continue programming time for two seconds, then
4. After Steps 13 have been
Steps 46. release.
completed, locate the Learn or
Smart button inside the garage The Universal Remote system
on the garage door opener should now activate the
receiver (motor-head unit). The garage door.
name and color of the button
may varyI
nforby
mat
ionmanufacturer.
Pr
ovi
dedby:
To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System
Universal Remote system buttons, having difficulty programming a gate
begin with Step 1 of Programming operator or garage door opener by
Operation
the Universal Remote System. using the Programming the Using the Universal Home
Universal Remote System Remote
Gate Operator and Canadian procedures, regardless of where
Programming you live, replace Step 2 under Press and hold the appropriate
If you have questions or need help Programming the Universal Remote Universal Home Remote button for
programming the Universal Remote System with the following: at least half of a second. The
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go indicator light will come on while the
Continue to press and hold the signal is being transmitted.
to www.homelink.com. Universal Remote system button
Canadian radio-frequency laws while you press and release every Erasing Universal Home
require transmitter signals to time two seconds (cycle) the hand-held Remote Buttons
out or quit after several seconds of transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been The programmed buttons should be
transmission. This may not be long erased when the vehicle is sold or
enough for the Universal Remote successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The the lease ends.
system to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S. Universal Remote system indicator To erase all programmed buttons on
gate operators are manufactured to light will flash slowly at first and then the Universal Home Remote device:
time out in the same manner. rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Programming the Universal Remote
System to complete.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Press and hold down the two

outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons,
repeat the programming instructions
earlier in this section, beginning with
Step 2.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call 1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic): Automatically

turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting The current status of the AUTO
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 system is displayed in the Driver
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Information Center (DIC) display.
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 See Vehicle Reminder Messages on
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 page 535.
Daytime Running ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps together with the
Automatic Headlamp following:
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 . Sidemarker Lamps
Turn and Lane-Change . Taillamps
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
instrument panel to the left of the . License Plate Lamps
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
steering wheel. . Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Lighting Turn the control to the following
Instrument Panel Illumination positions: 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 headlamps, together with the
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 9 (Off): Turns off the exterior previously listed lamps and lights.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released. Lamps On Reminder
Lighting Features A warning chime sounds, if the
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 driver door is opened while the
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 ignition is off and the lamps are on.
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2 Lighting
Wiper-Activated Headlamps
. The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
The headlamps and parking lamps
turn on automatically if the exterior Fully functional daytime running
lamp control is set in the AUTO lamps are required on all vehicles
position and the windshield wipers first sold in Canada.
are turned on and have completed When the DRL are on, the
eight wipe cycles. This indicator light turns on in the low-beam headlamps will be on.
instrument cluster when the The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
When the ignition is turned off, the
high-beam headlamps are on. instrument panel lights, and other
wiper-activated headlamps
immediately turn off. They also turn lamps will not be on.
off if the windshield wiper control is Flash-to-Pass When the exterior lamp control is
turned off. To flash the high beams, pull the turned to the headlamp position, the
turn signal lever toward you, and regular headlamps will come on.
Headlamp High/ release. The other lamps that come on with
Low-Beam Changer the headlamps will also come on.
Daytime Running When the headlamps are turned off,
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer): Push the turn signal Lamps (DRL) the regular lamps also turn off, and
lever away from you to turn the high the low-beam headlamps turn on.
On vehicles equipped with Daytime
beams on. Running Lamps (DRL), the The regular headlamp system
Pull the lever toward you to return to low-beam headlamps come on in should be used when needed.
low beams. daylight when all the following
conditions are met:
. The engine is running,
. The exterior lamp control is in
AUTO, and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lighting 6-3
Automatic Headlamp Lights On with Wipers | (Hazard Warning Flasher):

System If the windshield wipers are Press this button to make the front
activated in daylight with the engine and rear turn signal lamps flash on
When it is dark enough outside, the and off. This warns others that you
on, and the exterior lamp control is
headlamps come on automatically. are having trouble.
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
lamps, and other exterior lamps Press | again to turn the
come on. The transition time for the flashers off.
lamps coming on varies based on
wiper speed. When the wipers are
not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
Move the exterior lamp control to 9 Signals
or ; to disable this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Do not cover the light sensor on top

Move the lever all the way up or
of the instrument panel or the
down to signal a turn.
headlamps will come on when they
are not needed. An arrow on the instrument cluster
flashes in the direction of the turn or
The system may also turn on the
lane change.
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-4 Lighting
Raise or lower the lever until the For vehicles with fog lamps, the Interior Lighting
arrow starts to flash and then button is on the instrument panel
release, to signal a lane change. next to the exterior lamp control.
The turn signal flashes Instrument Panel
automatically three times.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
Illumination Control
fog lamps on or off.
The lever returns to its starting The fog lamp indicator in the The thumbwheel for this feature is
position whenever it is released. instrument panel comes on when on the left side of the steering wheel
If after signaling a turn or lane the fog lamps are in use. next to the exterior lamp control.
change the arrow flashes rapidly or The parking lamps or low-beam
does not come on, a signal bulb headlamps must be on, before the
may be burned out. fog lamps can be turned on.
Have any burned out bulbs If the exterior lamp control is set to
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, AUTO mode, the parking lamps and
check the fuse. See Instrument low-beam headlamps come on
Panel Fuse Block on page 1033. simultaneously when the fog lamps
are turned on.
Fog Lamps
When the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps turn off
automatically. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps come on again. Turn the thumbwheel to the right or
left to brighten or dim the instrument
Some localities have laws that
panel lights.
require the headlamps to be on with
the fog lamps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lighting 6-5
Dome Lamps + (On/Off): Press the button (2) to

turn the dome lamps on and off
while the doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
The rear reading lamps are in the

headliner.
To turn the reading lamps on or off,
press the button next to each lamp.
There are front and rear dome

lamps in the overhead console and
the headliner.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Press
the button (1) on the overhead The front reading lamps are in the
console to keep the dome lamps overhead console.
and other interior lamps turned off
while any door is open. Press this
button again to return it to the out
position and the lamps automatically
come on when any door is opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features When the battery's state of charge

is low, the voltage is raised slightly
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
to quickly bring the charge back up. by balancing the generator's output
Entry Lighting When the state of charge is high, and the vehicle's electrical needs.
If the dome lamp override button is the voltage is lowered slightly to It can increase engine idle speed to
in the out position, the lamps inside prevent overcharging. The voltage generate more power, whenever
the vehicle automatically come on may move up or down on the needed. It can temporarily reduce
when any door is opened or when voltmeter gauge or the voltage the power demands of some
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) K display on vehicles with the Driver accessories. Normally, these actions
Information Center. This is normal. occur in steps or levels, without
button is pressed. After the door is
If there is a problem, an alert will be being noticeable.
opened, the lamps remain on and
stay on for 20 seconds after the displayed.
doors are closed, or until the key is The battery can be discharged at Battery Power Protection
put into the ignition and turned to idle if the electrical loads are very The battery saver feature is
the ACC/ACCESSORY position. high. This is true for all vehicles. designed to protect the vehicle's
The lamps will then gradually dim This is because the generator battery.
until they are no longer lit. (alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the If any interior or exterior lamp is left
on and the ignition is turned off, the
Battery Load power that is needed for very high
battery rundown protection system
electrical loads.
Management automatically turns the lamp off after
A high electrical load occurs when 10 minutes.
The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
the battery's temperature and state lamps, rear window defogger,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
for best performance and extended heated seats, engine cooling fans,
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory powerInf
or outlets.
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Infotainment System 7-1

. Set up the tone, speaker
Infotainment Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
System Infotainment
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Read the following pages to Driving on page 93.
Introduction become familiar with the
Notice: Contact your dealer
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 infotainment system features.
before adding any equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
{ WARNING Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
Taking your eyes off the road for the operation of the engine, radio,
Radio extended periods could cause a or other systems, and could
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 crash resulting in injury or death damage them. Follow federal
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 rules covering mobile radio and
to you or others. Do not give
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 telephone equipment.
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-10 extended attention to infotainment
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-10 tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
Audio Players This system provides access to
the infotainment system can play
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 even after the ignition is turned off.
many audio and nonaudio listings.
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 See Retained Accessory Power
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 To minimize taking your eyes off the (RAP) on page 917 for more
road while driving, do the following information.
Phone while the vehicle is parked:
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2 Infotainment System
Theft-Deterrent Feature Overview

TheftLock is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
1. 4 (Information) 3. MENU
. Press to show information
. Press to open the tone
on the current station or menu to adjust the bass,
track. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
2. FAV (Favorites Pages)
. Press to scroll through the
favorite
Inf
or pages.
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Buttons 1 - 6 11. SEEK Operation

. Save and select favorite . Seeks the next station.
stations.
Playing the Radio
12. DVD Slot O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
5. EQ (Equalizer)
13. O (Power/Volume) the system on and off.
. Press to adjust the
equalizer settings. Turn to increase or decrease the
. Press to turn the
volume.
6. CAT (Category) infotainment system on
or off. 4 (Information) (MP3 and RDS
. Press to display a list of XM Features): Press to display
categories.
. Turn to adjust the volume.
additional text information related to
7. f (Tone) 14. s REV (Reverse) the current FM-RDS, CD, MP3,
or WMA. If information is available
. Press to set the bass or
. Press and hold to go during FM-RDS, CD, MP3, or WMA
treble. backward fast through a playback, the song title information
track. displays on the top line of the
8. H (Clock) 15. \ FWD (Forward) display and artist information
. Press to set the clock. displays on the bottom line. When
. Press and hold to fast information is not available, NO
9. BAND forward through a track. INFO displays.
. Press to scroll through the 16. CD/AUX
available bands AM, FM,
or XM if equipped.
. Press to scroll through
selecting the CD or an
10. SEEK auxiliary device.
. Seeks the previous 17. Z EJECT
station. . Press to eject the
loaded
Inf
ormat
ionPCD.
r
ovi
dedby:
Setting the Tone (Bass/ than two seconds. A beep sounds 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
Midrange/Treble) and the level adjusts to the middle do one of the following until the
position. desired levels are obtained:
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass, To quickly adjust all speaker and . Turn the f knob clockwise
midrange, or treble: tone controls to the middle position, or counterclockwise.
press the f knob for more than
1. Press the f knob until the tone two seconds until a beep sounds.
. Press the \ FWD, or s
control labels display. REV button.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select
2. Continue pressing the f knob to preset equalization settings. To quickly adjust balance or fade to
highlight the desired label, the middle position, press the
To return to the manual mode, press pushbutton under the BAL or FADE
or press the pushbutton under
the EQ button until Manual displays label for more than two seconds.
the desired label.
or manually adjust the bass, A beep sounds and the level adjusts
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, midrange, or treble by pressing the to the middle position.
do one of the following: f knob.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
. Turn the f knob clockwise Adjusting the Speakers tone controls to the middle position,
or counterclockwise. (Balance/Fade) press the f knob for more than
. Press the \ FWD, or s BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To two seconds until a beep sounds.
REV button. adjust the balance or fade:
Chime Volume
If a station's frequency is weak or if 1. Press the f knob until the The radio may be used to adjust the
there is static, decrease the treble. speaker control labels display. vehicle's chime level. If the radio
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, 2. Continue pressing the f knob to can be used to change the volume
or treble to the middle position, level of the chime, press and hold
highlight the desired label,
press the pushbutton under the the sixth FAV pushbutton with the
or press the pushbutton under
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more ignition on and the radio power off.
the desired label.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The volume level changes between Radio To scan stations, press and hold
Normal and Loud. The selected either button for a few seconds until
volume level appears on the radio a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
display. AM-FM Radio station, plays for a few seconds,
Removing the radio and not Radio Data System (RDS) then goes to the next station. Press
replacing it with a factory radio or either button again to stop scanning.
The RDS feature is available for use
chime module will disable vehicle only on FM stations that broadcast The radio only seeks and scans
chimes. RDS information. This system relies stations with a strong signal that are
upon receiving specific information in the selected band.
Radio Messages
from these stations and only works Storing a Radio Station as a
Calibration Error: The audio when the information is available.
system has been calibrated for the Favorite
While the radio is tuned to an
vehicle from the factory. FM-RDS station, the station name Drivers are encouraged to set up
If Calibration Error displays, it or call letters display. In rare cases, their radio station favorites while the
means that the radio has not been a radio station could broadcast vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
configured properly for the vehicle incorrect information that causes the favorite stations using the presets,
and it must be returned to your radio features to work improperly. favorites button, and steering wheel
dealer for service. If this happens, contact the radio controls. See Steering Wheel
Locked: This message displays station. Controls on page 52.
when the TheftLock system has FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
locked up the radio. Take the
Finding a Station
36 stations can be programmed as
vehicle to your dealer for service. BAND: Press to switch between favorites using the six pushbuttons
AM or FM. below the radio station frequency
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected, f (Tune): Turn to select radio labels, and by using the radio
contact your dealer. stations. favorites page button (FAV button).
Press to go through up to six pages
SEEK or SEEK: Press to go to of favorites, each having six favorite
the previous
I
nf
or
or
mat
i
to othe
onPr vi
next station.
dedby:
stations available per page. Each 3. Select the desired number of coast, and in digital-quality sound.
page of favorites can contain any favorites pages by pressing the A service fee is required to receive
combination of AM or FM stations. pushbutton below the displayed the SiriusXM service. For more
The balance/fade and tone settings page numbers. information, contact SiriusXM at
that were previously adjusted, are 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time www.siriusxm.com or
stored with the favorite stations. out, to return to the original main 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
radio screen showing the radio www.xmradio.ca or call
To store a station as a favorite: 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station frequency labels and to
1. Tune to a radio station. begin the process of Finding a Station
2. Press FAV to display the page programming favorites for the
chosen number of numbered BAND: Press to switch between
where to store the station. AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection
pages.
3. Press and hold one of the displays.
six pushbuttons until a beep Satellite Radio f (Tune): Turn to select radio
sounds. When that pushbutton is stations.

pressed and released, the Vehicles with a SiriusXM Satellite
station that was set returns. Radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM SEEK or SEEK: Press to go to
Satellite subscription can receive the previous or to the next station
4. Repeat the steps for each radio and stay there.
SiriusXM programming.
station to be stored as a favorite.
To set up the number of favorites SiriusXM Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and hold
pages: Service SEEK or SEEK until a beep
1. Press MENU to display the radio SiriusXM is a satellite radio service sounds. The radio goes to a station,
setup menu. based in the 48 contiguous United plays for a few seconds, then goes
States and 10 Canadian provinces. to the next station. Press either
2. Press the pushbutton below the SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide arrow again to stop scanning.
FAV 1-6 label. variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Finding a Category (CAT)

. Press the pushbutton below 4. Press the pushbutton under the
Station the right or left arrows on Remove tab until the category
the display. name along with the word
CAT (Category): The CAT button is Removed displays.
used to find SiriusXM stations when . Press the SEEK or
the radio is in the XM mode. To find SEEK button. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
SiriusXM channels within a desired more categories.
5. To exit the category search
category: mode, press the FAV button or Removed categories can be
1. Press BAND until the XM the BAND button to display the restored by pressing the pushbutton
frequency displays. favorites again. under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by
2. Press CAT to display the Removing SiriusXM Categories pressing the pushbutton under the
category tabs. Undesired SiriusXM categories can Restore All label.
3. To navigate through the be removed through the setup Categories cannot be removed or
categories, do one of the menu. To remove an undesired added while the vehicle is moving
following: category: faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
. Press the CAT button. 1. Press the MENU button.
Storing a Radio Station as a
. Press the s REV or \ 2. Press the pushbutton below the Favorite
FWD button. XM CAT label.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
. Turn the f knob. 3. Turn the f knob, then press the their radio station favorites while the
SEEK or SEEK button or the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
4. To tune to a station in the s REV or \ FWD button to favorite stations using the presets,
selected category, do one of the display the category to be favorites button, and steering wheel
following: removed. controls. See Steering Wheel
. Turn the f knob. Controls on page 52.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites XM Updating: The encryption code
36 stations can be programmed as pages: in the receiver is being updated, and
favorites using the six pushbuttons 1. Press MENU to display the radio no action is required. This process
below the radio station frequency setup menu. should take no longer than
labels and by using the radio 30 seconds.
favorites page button (FAV button). 2. Press the pushbutton below the
FAV 1-6 label. No XM Signal: The system is
Press to go through up to six pages functioning correctly, but the vehicle
of favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of is in a location that is blocking the
stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
page of favorites can contain any pushbutton below the displayed moved into an open area, the signal
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers. should return.
stations.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time Loading XM: The audio system is
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main acquiring and processing audio and
that were previously adjusted, are radio screen showing the radio text data. No action is needed. This
stored with the favorite stations. station frequency labels and to message should disappear shortly.
To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of
programming favorites for the Channel Off Air: This channel is
1. Tune to a radio station. chosen number of favorites not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press FAV to display the page pages. another channel.
where to store the station. Channel Unauth: This channel is
SiriusXM Radio Messages blocked or cannot be received with
3. Press and hold one of the
six pushbuttons until a beep XL (Explicit Language your SiriusXM Subscription
sounds. When that pushbutton is Channels): These channels, or any package.
pressed and released, the others, can be blocked at a Channel Unavail: This previously
station that was set returns. customer's request, by calling assigned channel is no longer
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) or assigned. Tune to another station.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station to be stored as a favorite.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If this station was one of the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and Check XM Receiver: If this
presets, choose another station for www.xmradio.ca or call message does not clear within a
that preset button. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). short period of time, the receiver
No Artist Info: No artist CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
information is available at this time channels available for the selected dealer.
on this channel. The system is category. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message
working properly. properly. does not clear within a short period
No Title Info: No song title XM Theftlocked: The SiriusXM of time, the receiver could have a
information is available at this time receiver in the vehicle could have fault. Consult with your dealer.
on this channel. The system is previously been in another vehicle.
working properly. For security purposes, SiriusXM Radio Reception
No CAT Info: No category receivers cannot be swapped Frequency interference and static
information is available at this time between vehicles. If this message is can occur during normal radio
on this channel. The system is received after having the vehicle reception if items such as cell phone
working properly. serviced, check with your dealer. chargers, vehicle convenience
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, accessories, and external electronic
No Information: No text or devices are plugged into the
informational messages are this message alternates with the
SiriusXM Radio eight digit radio ID accessory power outlet. If there is
available at this time on this interference or static, unplug the
channel. The system is working label. This label is needed to
activate the service. item from the accessory power
properly. outlet.
No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is
SiriusXM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at there could be a receiver fault.
www.siriusxm.com or Consult with your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FM Fixed Mast Antenna Audio Players

FM signals only reach about 16 to The fixed mast antenna can
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the withstand most car washes without CD Player
radio has a built-in electronic circuit being damaged as long as it is
that automatically works to reduce securely attached to the base. If the Care of the CD Player
interference, some static can occur, mast becomes slightly bent, Do not add any label to a CD.
especially around tall buildings or straighten it out by hand. If the mast It could get caught in the CD player.
hills, causing the sound to fade in is badly bent, replace it. If a CD is recorded on a personal
and out. computer and a description label is
Occasionally check to make sure
AM the antenna is tightened to its base. needed, try labeling the top of the
If tightening is required, tighten recorded CD with a marking pen.
The range for most AM stations is
by hand. The use of CD lens cleaners for
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause CDs is not advised, due to the risk
station frequencies to interfere with Satellite Radio Antenna of contaminating the lens of the CD
each other. For better radio optics with lubricants internal to the
The SiriusXM Satellite Radio CD player mechanism.
reception, most AM radio stations antenna is on the roof of the vehicle.
boost the power levels during the Keep the antenna clear of Notice: If a label is added to a
day, and then reduce these levels obstructions for clear radio CD, more than one CD is inserted
during the night. Static can also reception. into the slot at a time, or an
occur when things like storms and attempt is made to play scratched
power lines interfere with radio If the vehicle has a sunroof, the or damaged CDs, the CD player
reception. When this happens, try performance of the SiriusXM system could be damaged. While using
reducing the treble on the radio. may be affected if the sunroof the CD player, use only CDs in
is open. good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the CD player and the loading slot If the surface of a CD is soiled, When a CD is inserted, the CD
free of foreign materials, liquids, clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth or symbol displays on the left side of
and debris. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, the radio display. As each new track
If an error displays, see CD Player neutral detergent solution mixed starts to play, the track number
Messages later in this section. with water. Make sure the wiping displays.
process starts from the center to The CD player can play the smaller
Care of CDs the edge. 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Inserting a CD adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
can be reduced due to CD-R or smaller CDs are loaded in the same
CD-RW quality, the method of Insert a CD partway into the slot, manner.
recording, the quality of the music label side up. The player pulls it in
and the CD should begin playing. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
that has been recorded, and the cycle through CD or Auxiliary when
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been Ejecting a CD listening to the radio. The CD icon
handled. Handle them carefully. and a message showing the disc
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their Z EJECT: Press and release to
eject the disc. Remove the CD and/or track number display when a
original cases or other protective CD is in the player. Press again and
cases and away from direct sunlight when Remove Disc displays. If the
disc is not removed, after several the system automatically searches
and dust. The CD player scans the for an auxiliary input device. See
bottom surface of the disc. If the seconds, the disc is automatically
pulled back into the player. Auxiliary Devices on page 719. If a
surface of a CD is damaged, such portable audio player is not
as cracked, broken, or scratched, Playing a CD connected, No Input Device Found
the CD does not play properly or not displays.
at all. Do not touch the bottom side If the ignition or radio is turned off
of a CD while handling it; this could with a CD in the player, it stays in 4 (Information): Press to display
damage the surface. Pick up CDs the player. When the ignition or additional text information related to
by grasping the outer edges or the radio is turned on, the CD starts the current song. If information is
edge of the hole and the outer edge. playing where it stopped if it was the available, the song title information
last selected audio source. displays on the top line of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
display and artist information \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
displays on the bottom line. When and hold to advance playback Discs
information is not available, NO quickly within a track. The radio can play discs that
INFO displays. contain both uncompressed CD
RDM (Random): Press to listen to
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on tracks in random, rather than audio and MP3 files. If both formats
the CD currently playing. sequential order. To use random: are on the disc, the radio reads all
SEEK: Press to go to the start of MP3 files first, then the
1. Press the softkey under the uncompressed CD audio files.
the current track, if more than RDM tab until Random Current
10 seconds on the CD have played. Disc displays. CD-R or CD-RW Supported File
Press to go to the previous track if and Folder Structure
2. Press the softkey again to turn
less than 10 seconds on the CD off random play. The radio supports:
have played.
MP3 Supported Files
. Up to 50 folders.
Press and hold, or press multiple . Up to eight folders in depth.
times to continue moving backward Format
through the tracks on the CD. . Up to 50 playlists.
Radios that have the capability of
SEEK: Press to go to the next playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma . Up to 255 files.
track. files that were recorded onto a . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
Press and hold, or press multiple CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can extension.
times to continue moving forward be recorded with the following fixed
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
through the tracks on the CD. extension.
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, Root Directory
and hold to reverse playback quickly 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or
within a track. a variable bit rate. The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root

. Play begins from the first track in playlist editing capability using the
directory of a CD display as the first folder and continues radio. These playlists are treated as
F1 ROOT. sequentially through all tracks in special folders containing
each folder. When the last track compressed audio song files.
Empty Folder of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
Folders that do not contain files are file extension and are stored on a
skipped, and the player advances to track of the first folder.
USB device may be supported by
the next folder that contains files. File System and Naming the radio with a USB port.
Order of Play The song name that displays is the Playlists can be changed by using
Compressed audio files are song name contained in the ID3 tag. the softkeys below the S c and
accessed in the following order: If the song name is not present in c T tabs, the f knob, the SEEK
the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
. Playlists (Px). the file name without the extension button, or the SEEK button. An
. Files stored in the root directory. (such as .mp3) as the track name. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has been
recorded without using file folders
. Files stored in folders in the root Track names longer than 32 can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
directory. characters or 4 pages are contains more than the maximum of
shortened. The display does not 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
Tracks are played in the following
show parts of words on the last 512 folders and files, the player
order:
page of text and the extension of allows access and navigates up to
. Play begins from the first track in the file name is not displayed. the maximum, but all items over the
the first playlist and continues maximum are not accessible.
sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists
each playlist. When the last CDs that have preprogrammed Playing an MP3
track of the last playlist has playlists that were created using 4 (Information): Press to display
played, play continues from the WinAmp, MusicMatch, or Real additional text information related to
first track of the first playlist. Jukebox software can be the current song. If information is
accessed; however, there is no available, the song title information
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
displays on the top line of the file displays. Release \ FWD to on the number of files on the disc.
display and artist information resume playing. The elapsed time of The radio may begin playing while it
displays on the bottom line. When the file displays. is scanning in the background.
information is not available, NO When the scan is finished, the disc
INFO displays. S c (Previous Folder): Press
begins playing files in order by
the softkey below the S c tab to
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files artist. The current artist playing is
on the CD currently playing. go to the first track in the previous shown on the second line of the
folder. display. Once all songs by that artist
SEEK: Press to go to the start of
c T (Next Folder): Press the are played, the player moves to the
the track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press and hold or softkey below the c T tab to go to next artist in alphabetical order and
press multiple times to continue the first track in the next folder. begins playing files by that artist.
moving backward through tracks. RDM (Random): Press to listen to To listen to files by another artist,
SEEK: Press to go to the next tracks in random, rather than press the softkey below either arrow
track. Press and hold or press sequential order. To use random: tab. The disc goes to the next or
multiple times to continue moving previous artist in alphabetical order.
1. Press the softkey under the Continue pressing either softkey
forward through tracks. RDM tab until Random Current below the arrow tab until the desired
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold Disc displays. artist displays.
to reverse playback quickly. Sound 2. Press the softkey again to turn
is heard at a reduced volume and To change from playback by artist to
off random play. playback by album:
the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release s REV to resume playing.
h (Music Navigator): Press the 1. Press the softkey below the Sort
softkey below the h tab to have By tab.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press the files played in order by artist or
and hold to advance playback 2. Press one of the softkeys below
album. The player scans the disc to the album tab from the sort
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced sort the files by artist and album ID3
volume and the elapsed time of the screen.
tag information. It can take several
minutes to scan I
nfor
the
mat
i
disc
onPr
ovi
depending
dedby:
3. Press the softkey below the

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
back tab to return to the main or upside down. 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
music navigator screen. . The air is very humid. If so, wait 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
The album name displays on the about an hour and try again. variable bit rate. Song title, artist
second line between the arrows, name, and album are available for
. There was a problem while display by the radio when recorded
and songs from the current album burning the CD.
begin to play. Once all songs from using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
that album have played, the player
. The label is caught in the CD
Playing an MP3
moves to the next album in player.
alphabetical order on the CD and If the CD is not playing correctly, for
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
begins playing MP3 files from that on the CD-R or CD-RW currently
any other reason, try a known
album. playing.
good CD.
To exit music navigator mode, press If any error occurs repeatedly or if
SEEK: Press SEEK to go to
the softkey below the Back tab to the start of the current MP3 file,
an error cannot be corrected,
return to normal MP3 playback. if more than 10 seconds have
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it played. If SEEK is held or pressed
CD Player Messages down and provide it to your dealer multiple times, the player continues
CHECK DISC: If this message when reporting the problem. moving backward through MP3 files
displays and/or the CD ejects, it on the CD.
could be for one of the following MP3 SEEK: Press SEEK to go to
reasons: the next track. Press SEEK and
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
. It is very hot. When the hold or press multiple times to
temperature returns to normal, The radio plays MP3 files that were continue moving forward through
the CD should play. recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. tracks.
The files can be recorded with the
. The road is very rough. When following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
the road becomes smoother, the 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
CD should play. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
S c (Previous Folder): Press Current Disc displays. Press the begins playing MP3 files by that
the softkey under the Folder label to same softkey again to turn off artist. To listen to MP3 files by
go to the first track in the previous random play. another artist, press the softkey
folder. h (Music Navigator): Use the below either arrow button. The disc
goes to the next or previous artist in
c T (Next Folder): Press the music navigator feature to play MP3
alphabetical order. Continue
softkey under the Folder label to go files on the CD-R or CD-RW in
order by artist or album. Press the pressing either softkey until the
to the first track in the next folder. desired artist is displayed.
softkey below the music navigator
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold label. The player scans the disc to To change from playback by artist to
to reverse playback quickly within sort the files by artist and album ID3 playback by album, press the
an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a tag information. It can take several softkey below the Sort By label.
reduced volume. Release to resume minutes to scan the disc depending From the sort screen, push one of
playing the file. The elapsed time of on the number of MP3 files the softkeys below the album label.
the file displays. recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. Press the softkey below the Back
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The radio can begin playing while it label to return to the main music
and hold to advance playback is scanning the disc in the navigator screen. Now the album
quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is background. When the scan is name is displayed on the second
heard at a reduced volume. Release finished, the CD-R or CD-RW line between the arrows, and songs
to resume playing the file. The begins playing again. from the current album begin to
elapsed time of the file displays. Once the disc has been scanned, play. Once all songs from that
the player defaults to playing MP3 album are played, the player moves
RDM (Random): With the random
files in order by artist. The current to the next album in alphabetical
setting, the MP3 files on the CD-R
artist playing is shown on the order on the CD-R/CD-RW and
or CD-RW can be listened to in
second line of the display between begins playing MP3 files from that
random, rather than sequential
the arrows. Once all songs by that album.
order, on one CD-R/CD-RW. To play
MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW artist are played, the player moves To exit music navigator mode, press
in random order, press the softkey to the next artist in alphabetical the softkey below the Back label to
under the RDM label until Random order on the CD-R/CD-RW
Inf
ormat
ionPr dedby: and
ovi return to normal MP3 playback.
Compressed Audio
. Create a folder structure that minimize the length of the file,
makes it easy to find songs folder, or playlist name. Long
The radio also plays discs that while driving. Organize songs by
contain both uncompressed CD names also take up more space
albums using one folder for each on the display, potentially getting
audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By album. Each folder or album
default the radio reads only the cut off.
should contain 18 songs or less.
uncompressed audio and ignores . Finalize the audio disc before
the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT
. Avoid subfolders. The system burning it. Trying to add music to
(category) button toggles between can support up to an existing disc can cause the
compressed and uncompressed eight subfolders deep; however, disc not to function in the player.
audio format. keep the total number of folders
to a minimum in order to reduce Playlists can be changed by using
MP3 Supported File and Folder the complexity and confusion in S c and c T , the tune knob,
Structure trying to locate a particular folder or the SEEK arrows. An MP3 CD-R
during playback. or CD-RW that was recorded using
To burn an MP3 disc on a personal
no file folders can also be played.
computer: . Make sure playlists have a .m3u If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
. Make sure the MP3 files are or .wpl extension; other file than the maximum of 50 folders, 50
recorded on a CD-R or extensions may not work. playlists, and 255 files, the player
CD-RW disc. . Minimize the length of the file, can access and navigate up to the
. Do not mix standard audio and folder, or playlist names. Long maximum, but all items over the
MP3 files on one disc. file, folder, or playlist names, maximum are not accessible.
.
or a combination of a large Root Directory
The CD player is able to read number of files, folders,
and play a maximum of or playlists can cause the player The root directory of the CD-R or
50 folders, 50 playlists, and to be unable to play up to the CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the
255 files. maximum number of files, root directory has compressed audio
folders, playlists, or sessions. To files, the directory displays as F1
play a large number of files, ROOT. All files contained directly
folders,Inplaylists
for
mat
ionPr
ovi
deor sessions,
dby: under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folder. The folder down and up folder mode is chosen as the default
folders. However, playlists (Px) are buttons search playlists (Px) first display. The new track name
always accessed before root folders and then go to the root folder. When displays.
or files. the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio displays ROOT. File System and Naming
Empty Directory or Folder The song name displayed is the
If a root directory or a folder exists Order of Play song name contained in the ID3 tag.
somewhere in the file structure that Tracks recorded to the CD-R or If the song name is not present in
contains only folders/subfolders and CD-RW are played in the following the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
no compressed files directly order: the file name without the extension
beneath them, the player advances . Play begins from the first track in (such as .mp3) as the track name.
to the next folder in the file structure the first playlist and continues Track names longer than 32
that contains compressed audio sequentially through all tracks in characters or four pages are
files. The empty folder does not each playlist. When the last shortened. Parts of words on the
display. track of the last playlist has last page of text and the extension
No Folder played, play continues from the of the file name do not display.
first track of the first playlist.
When the CD contains only Preprogrammed Playlists
. Play begins from the first track in
compressed files, the files are under Preprogrammed playlists created by
the root folder. The next and the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in WinAmp, MusicMatch, or Real
previous folder functions do not Jukebox software can be
display on a CD that was recorded each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has been accessed; however, they cannot be
without folders or playlists. When edited using the radio. These
displaying the name of the folder, played, play continues from the
first track of the first folder. playlists are treated as special
the radio displays ROOT. folders containing compressed
When the CD contains only playlists When play enters a new folder, the audio song files.
and compressed audio files, but no display does not automatically show
folders, all files are under the root the new folder name unless the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Auxiliary Devices O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise Using the USB Port

or counterclockwise to increase or
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack decrease the volume of the portable
Radios with an auxiliary input jack player. Additional volume
on the lower right side of the adjustments might have to be made
faceplate can connect to an external from the portable device if the
audio device such as an iPod, volume is not loud or soft enough.
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as BAND: Press to listen to the radio
another source for audio listening. when a portable audio device is
This input jack is not an audio playing. The portable audio device
output; do not plug headphones into continues playing.
the front auxiliary input jack.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
To use a portable audio player, play a CD when a portable audio
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to device is playing. Press again and
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. the system begins playing audio Radios with a USB port can control
When a device is connected, press from the connected portable audio a USB storage device or an iPod
the radio CD/AUX button to begin player. If a portable audio player is using the radio buttons and knobs.
playing audio from the device over not connected, No Input Device The USB port is in the center
the vehicle speakers. Found displays. console.
For optimal sound quality, increase USB Support
the portable audio device's volume The USB connector is in the center
to the loudest level.
console, and uses the USB 2.0
It is always best to power the standard.
portable audio device through its
own battery while playing. USB Supported Devices
. USB Flash Drives
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Portable USB Hard Drives . Up to 65,535 files. appear on the iPod and iPod
. Fifth generation or later iPod . Folder and file names up to appears on the radio display. The
64 bytes. iPod music appears on the radios
. iPod nano display and begins playing.
. iPod touch
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension. The iPod charges while it is
. iPod classic connected to the vehicle if the
. AAC files stored on an iPod. vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
Not all iPods and USB drives are . FAT16. or ON/RUN position. When the
compatible with the USB port.
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
Make sure the iPod has the latest
. FAT32.
automatically powers off and will not
firmware from Apple for proper Connecting a USB Storage charge or draw power from the
operation. iPod firmware can be Device or iPod vehicle's battery.
updated using the latest iTunes
The USB port can be used to If you have an older iPod model that
application. See www.apple.com/
control an iPod or a USB storage is not supported, it can still be used
itunes.
device. by connecting it to the auxiliary
For help with identifying your iPod, input jack using a standard 3.5 mm
go to www.apple.com/support. To connect a USB storage device, (1/8 in) stereo cable. See Using the
connect the device to the USB port Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more
Radios that have a USB port can in the center console or on the
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a information.
instrument panel.
USB storage device as well as AAC Using the Radio to Control a
files stored on an iPod. To connect an iPod, connect one
end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod
USB Supported File and Folder with the iPod to the iPods dock The radio can control a USB
Structure connector and connect the other storage device or an iPod using the
The radio supports: end to the USB port in the center radio buttons and knobs, and
console. If the vehicle is on and the display song information on the
. Up to 700 folders. USB connection works, OK to radios display.
. Up to eight folders in depth. disconnect and I
nf a tiGM
or
ma onPr logo
ovi
dedby: may
f (Tune): Turn to select files. Using Softkeys to Control a c (Folder View): Press the
SEEK: Press to go to the start of USB Storage Device or iPod softkey below c to view the
the track, if more than 10 seconds The six softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on the
have played. Press and hold or display are used to control the USB drive. To browse and select
press multiple times to continue functions listed below. files:
moving backward through tracks. To use the softkeys: 1. Press the softkey below c.
SEEK: Press to go to the next 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
track. Press and hold or press 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
below the radio display to
multiple times to continue moving of folders.
display the functions listed
forward through tracks. below, or press the softkey 3. Press f to select the desired
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below the function if it is folder. If there is more then one
to reverse playback quickly. Sound currently displayed. folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
is heard at a reduced volume. 2. Press the softkey below the tab the desired folder is reached.
Release s REV to resume playing. with the function on it to use that
The elapsed time of the file 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
function.
displays. in the selected folder.
j (Pause): Press the softkey
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press 5. Press f to select the desired file
below j to pause the track. The tab
and hold to advance playback to be played.
appears raised when pause is being
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced To skip through large lists, the five
used. Press the softkey below j
volume. Release \ FWD to softkeys can be used to navigate in
again to resume playback.
resume playing. The elapsed time of the following order:
the file displays. Back: Press the softkey below the
radio display to go back to the main
. First softkey, first item in the list.
4 (Information): Press to display display screen on an iPod, or the . Second softkey, 1% through the
additional information about the root directory on a USB storage list each time the softkey is
selected track. device. pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Third softkey, 5% through the list
3. Press f to select the Repeat Functionality
each time the softkey is pressed.
desired menu. To use Repeat:
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is 4. Turn f to scroll through the Press the softkey below " or '
pressed. folders or files in the to select between Repeat All and
selected menu. Repeat Track.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator): Press the 5. Press f to select the desired file " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
to be played. below " to repeat all tracks. The
softkey below h to view and
To skip through large lists, the five tab appears lowered when Repeat
select a file on an iPod, using the
softkeys can be used to navigate in All is being used. This is the default
iPod's menu system. Files are
the following order: mode when a USB storage device
sorted by:
or iPod is first connected.
. Playlists . First softkey, first item in the list.
' (Repeat Track): Press the
. Artists . Second softkey, 1% through the
softkey below ' to repeat one
list each time the softkey is
. Albums pressed. track. The tab appears raised when
. Genres Repeat Track is being used.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
. Songs each time the softkey is pressed. Shuffle Functionality
. Composers . Fourth softkey, 10% through the To use Shuffle:
To select files: list each time the softkey is Press the softkey below >, 2,
pressed. C , or = to select between
1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list. Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
2. Turn f to scroll through the list Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
of menus.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the Phone The system may not work with
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle all cell phones. See Pairing in
off. This is the default mode when a Bluetooth this section for more information.
USB storage device or iPod is first
connected. For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the
Songs): Press the softkey below allowing: address book or contact list. See
= or C to shuffle all songs on Voice Pass-Thru in this section
the USB storage device or iPod.
. Placement and receipt of calls in
a hands-free mode. for more information.
C (Shuffle Album): Press the . See Storing and Deleting Phone
. Sharing of the cell phones
softkey below > to shuffle all address book or contact list with Numbers in this section for
songs in the current album on the vehicle. more information.
an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING
softkey below > to shuffle all parked: When using a cell phone, it can
songs in the current folder on a USB be distracting to look too long or
. Become familiar with the
storage device. too often at the screen of the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too
If possible, program speed dial often could cause a crash
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus
. Review the controls and your attention on driving.
operation of the infotainment
system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A Bluetooth system can use a When to Speak: A short tone J / 0 (Call/Mute): Press to answer
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a sounds after the system responds incoming calls, confirm system
Hands-Free Profile to make and indicating when it is waiting for a information, and start speech
receive phone calls. The system voice command. Wait until the tone recognition.
can be used while the key is in the and then speak.
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY K (End Call): Press to end a call,
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
position. The range of the Bluetooth calm and natural voice.
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Pairing
Not all phones support all functions, Audio System
and not all phones work with the A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See
information on compatible phones.
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user
Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The
recognition to interpret voice phone is not connected, calls will be
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free
commands to dial phone numbers memory for later calls. To prevent
and name tags. Calling, if equipped. See OnStar
missed calls, a minimum volume Overview on page 141.
For additional information, say level is used if the volume is turned
Help while you are in a voice down too low. Pairing Information
recognition menu. . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to capability cannot be paired to
a minimum. The system may not Use the buttons on the steering the vehicle as a phone and an
recognize voice commands if there wheel to operate the in-vehicle MP3 player at the same time.
is too much background noise. Bluetooth system. See Steering . Up to five cell phones can be
Wheel Controls on page 52.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. The pairing process is disabled 3. Say Pair. The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected
when the vehicle is moving. with instructions and a four-digit Phones
. Pairing only needs to be Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones
completed once, unless the (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
pairing information on the cell 4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with is connected
is deleted from the system. For help with this process, see after that phone name.
. Only one paired cell phone can the cell phone manufacturer's
be connected to the Bluetooth user guide. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
two seconds.
system at a time. 5. Locate the device named Your
Vehicle in the list on the cell 2. Say Bluetooth.
. If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say List.
system connects to the first on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to
to the system. To connect to a system prompts you to provide a delete is unknown, see Listing All
different paired phone, see name for the paired cell phone. Paired and Connected Phones.
Connecting to a Different This name will be used to
Phone later in this section. indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
paired and connected to the two seconds.
Pairing a Phone vehicle. The system responds 2. Say Bluetooth.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for with <phone name> has been
successfully paired after the 3. Say Delete. The system asks
two seconds. which phone to delete.
pairing process is complete.
2. Say Bluetooth. This command 4. Say the name of the phone you
6. Repeat Steps 15 to pair
can be skipped. want to delete.
additional phones.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the Store Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to 30 two seconds.
next available cell phone in the phone numbers as name tags in the
order in which all available cell 2. Say Store.
Hands-Free Directory that is shared
phones were paired. Depending on between the Bluetooth and OnStar 3. Say the phone number or group
which cell phone you want to systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all
connect to, you may have to use at once with no pauses, then
this command several times. The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the
to delete and store phone numbers.
system to save a name tag for
1. Press and hold J / 0 for Store: This command will store a this number.
two seconds. phone number, or a group of
2. Say Bluetooth. numbers as a name tag. Using the Digit Store Command
3. Say Change phone. Digit Store: This command allows If an unwanted number is
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is Clear at any time to clear the last
name tag by entering the digits one
found, the response will be number.
at a time.
<Phone name> is now
connected. Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not Verify at any time.
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This
remains connected. command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
tags in the Hands-Free Calling two seconds.
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say Digit Store.
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped. 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
repeats back the digit it heard Listing Stored Numbers Using the Dial or Call
followed by a tone. After the last Command
The list command will list all stored
digit has been entered, say
Store, and then follow the
numbers and name tags. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
directions given by the system to Using the List Command two seconds.
save a name tag for this number. 2. Say Dial or Call.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for
Using the Delete Command two seconds. 3. Say the entire number without
pausing, or say the name tag.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for 2. Say Directory.
two seconds. Once connected, the person called
3. Say Hands-Free Calling. will be heard through the audio
2. Say Delete. 4. Say List. speakers.
3. Say the name tag you want to Calling 911 Emergency
delete. Making a Call
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Calls can be made using the 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
following commands. two seconds.
Command
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say Dial or Call.
This command deletes all stored
command can be used
name tags in the Hands-Free 3. Say 911.
interchangeably to dial a phone
Calling Directory and the OnStar 4. Say Dial or Call.
number or a stored name tag.
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped. Digit Dial: This command allows a Once connected, the person called
phone number to be dialed by will be heard through the audio
To delete all name tags: speakers.
entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for Re-dial: This command is used to Using the Digit Dial Command
two seconds. dial the last number used on the cell
The digit dial command allows a
2. Say Delete all name tags. phone.
phone number to be dialed by
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the Using the Re-dial Command . Press J / 0 again to return to
system repeats back the digit it the original call.
heard followed by a tone. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
If an unwanted number is action is required.
recognized by the system, say 2. After the tone, say Re-dial.
Clear at any time to clear the last Once connected, the person called
. Press K to disconnect the
number. will be heard through the audio current call and switch to the call
speakers. on hold.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling
Verify at any time.
When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be
1. Press and hold J / 0 for the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
two seconds. tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
2. Say Digit Dial. . Press J / 0 to answer the call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
1. While on a call, press J / 0.
that you want to dial. After each
. Press K to ignore a call. 2. Say Three-way call.
digit is entered, the system Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
repeats back the digit it heard
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party
followed by a tone. After the last
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called.
digit has been entered,
say Dial. wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
Once connected, the person called . Press J / 0 to answer an press J / 0 to link all callers
will be heard through the audio incoming call when another call together.
speakers. is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ending a Call Transferring Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone:
Press K to end a call.
During a call with the audio in the 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
Muting a Call vehicle: two seconds.
During a call, all sounds from inside 1. Press J / 0. 2. Say Bluetooth. This command
the vehicle can be muted so that the can be skipped.
person on the other end of the call 2. Say Transfer Call.
cannot hear them. 3. Say Voice. The system
Transferring Audio to the
responds OK, accessing
Bluetooth System from a Cell
. To mute a call, press J / 0 , and Phone
<phone name>.
then say Mute call. The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the
. To cancel mute, press J / 0 , messages will go through their cycle
cell phone, press J / 0. The audio according to the phone's operating
and then say Un-mute call.
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions.
Transferring a Call does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Audio can be transferred between phone. See your cell phone (DTMF) Tones
the Bluetooth system and the cell manufacturer's user guide for more
phone. The Bluetooth system can send
information. numbers and the numbers stored as
The cell phone must be paired and name tags during a call. You can
connected with the Bluetooth Voice Pass-Thru
use this feature when calling a
system before a call can be Voice pass-thru allows access to the menu-driven phone system.
transferred. The connection process voice recognition commands on the Account numbers can also be
can take up to two minutes after the cell phone. See your cell phone stored for use.
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sending a Number or Name Tag Other Information

During a Call
The Bluetooth word mark and
1. Press J / 0. The system logos are owned by the Bluetooth
responds Ready, followed by SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
a tone. by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
2. Say Dial. are those of their respective owners.
3. Say the number or name tag See Radio Frequency Statement on
to send. page 1320 for information
Clearing the System regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Unless information is deleted out of rules and Industry Canada
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous section Deleting a Paired
Phone and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
Automatic Climate Control Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 22.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

4. Recirculation 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise

5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed. To turn the
6. Air Conditioning
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
fan off, turn the knob all the way
8-2 Climate Controls
counterclockwise. In any setting When this mode is selected, the For best results, clear all snow and
other than off, the fan runs system turns the recirculation mode ice from the windshield before
continuously with the ignition on. off. Recirculation mode cannot be defrosting.
There will be some airflow selected while in floor mode. This # (Air Conditioning): Press to
noticeable from the various outlets helps prevent window fogging. turn the air conditioning system on
when driving, even with the fan in - (Defog): Clears the windows of or off. An indicator light comes on to
the off position. To turn off the air fog or moisture. Air is directed to the show that the air conditioning is on.
completely, turn the fan to 9 and floor outlets, with some air directed The air conditioning can be selected
select the @ button. to the windshield and side window in any mode as long as the fan is on
Temperature Control: Turn outlets. In this mode, the system and the outside temperature is
clockwise or counterclockwise to turns the recirculation mode off and above freezing. A flashing indicator
increase or decrease the runs the air conditioning compressor light indicates that the air
temperature inside the vehicle. unless the outside air is at or below conditioning compressor is currently
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot not available.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn be selected while in defog mode.
clockwise or counterclockwise to On hot days, open the windows to
This helps prevent window fogging. let hot inside air escape; then close
change the current airflow mode.
0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost them. This helps reduce the time it
Select from the following air delivery from the windshield more quickly. takes for the vehicle to cool down
modes: Air is directed to the windshield and and helps the system to operate
H (Vent): Air is directed to the the side window outlets. In this more efficiently.
instrument panel outlets. mode, the system turns the For quick cool down on hot days,
recirculation mode off automatically select the following settings
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided and runs the air conditioning
between the instrument panel and together:
compressor unless the outside air is
the floor outlets. at or below freezing. Recirculation 1. Select H mode.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the mode cannot be selected while in
floor outlets with some air directed defrost mode. This helps prevent 2. Select 8.
to the windshield. window fogging.I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Turn the # on. air mode can be used with all prevent window fogging and
modes, but it cannot be used with moisture building up inside the
4. Select the coolest temperature the recirculation mode. Pressing this vehicle.
and highest fan speed. button will cancel the
recirculation mode. Rear Window Defogger
5. Once the vehicle's interior
temperature is below the outside @ (Recirculation): Press to turn The rear window defogger uses a
temperature, select recirculation on the recirculation mode. An warming grid to remove fog from the
mode for enhanced cooling. indicator light comes on to show rear window.
Using these settings together for that recirculation is on. This mode The rear window defogger only
long periods of time may cause the recirculates and helps to quickly works when the ignition is in
air inside the vehicle to become too cool or heat the air inside the ON/RUN.
dry. To prevent this from happening, vehicle. It can be used to prevent
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
after the air inside of the vehicle has outside air and odors from entering
Press to turn the rear window
cooled, turn the recirculation the vehicle. Avoid using the
defogger on or off. An indicator light
mode off. recirculation mode during high
on the button comes on to show that
periods of humidity and cool outside
The air conditioning system the rear window is activated.
temperatures since this may result
removes moisture from the air, so a in increased window fogging. The rear window defogger stays on
small amount of water might drip If window fogging is experienced, for approximately 10 minutes after
under the vehicle while idling or select the defrost mode. the button is pressed, unless the
after turning off the engine. This is ignition is turned to ACC/
normal. Recirculation mode is not available
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
in floor, defog, or defrost modes and
8 (Outside Air): Press to turn will shut off automatically and
If turned on again, the defogger only
the outside air mode on. An runs for approximately five minutes
change to outside air. The indicator
indicator light comes on to show before turning off again. At higher
will flash if the button is selected in
that outside air is on. Air from vehicle speeds, the defogger may
any of these modes. This helps
outside the vehicle will circulate
throughout the vehicle. The outside
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
stay on continuously. The defogger Automatic Climate Control System

can also be turned off by turning off
the engine. The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
Notice: Do not use anything system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
sharp on the inside of the rear Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 22.
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
L or M : Press to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
seatback. To turn off, press the
button until the indicator lights turn
off. See Heated Front Seats on
page 36.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation
For vehicles with the remote start
feature, when it is activated, the 4. Recirculation Automatic Operation
climate control system heats and
cools the inside of the vehicle using 5. Air Delivery Mode Control This climate control system
the modes that were set before the automatically maintains the desired
6. Air Conditioning temperature inside the vehicle. Do
vehicle was turned off. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
not cover the sensor on the top of heat or cool the vehicle faster. The fan off, turn the left knob to the 9
the instrument panel near the @ button indicator light is lit position. In any setting other than
windshield, or the sensor grille whenever the recirculation mode off, the fan runs continuously with
below the climate control faceplate. is on. the ignition on. The fan must be
These two sensors help regulate the turned on to run the air conditioning
inside air temperature. Press the 8 button to change to
outside air. However, the compressor. There will be some
AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn the recirculation mode may turn back on airflow noticeable from the various
fan knob to AUTO for the system to automatically. outlets when driving, even with the
automatically adjust the fan speed fan in the off position. To turn off the
to reach the desired inside In cold weather, if the fan and air air completely, turn the fan to 9
temperature. delivery modes are in automatic, the and select the @ button.
system starts at lower fan speeds to
Temperature Control: Select the avoid directing cold air into the Temperature Control: Turn
desired cabin air temperature vehicle until warmer air is available. clockwise or counterclockwise to
between 16-32C (60-90F). The climate control system directs increase or decrease the
Choosing the coldest or warmest air to the floor, but may temperature. Select the desired
temperature setting does not cause automatically change modes as the cabin air temperature between
the system to heat or cool any vehicle warms up to maintain the 16-32C (60-90F). Typically, the
faster. chosen temperature setting. The best setting is near 23C (75F).
AUTO (Automatic Air Delivery length of time needed to warm the Choosing the coldest or warmest
Mode): Turn the air delivery mode interior depends on the outside temperature setting does not cause
knob to AUTO for the system to temperature and inside temperature the system to heat or cool any
automatically control the direction of of the vehicle. faster.
the airflow to help reach the desired Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
inside temperature.
Manual Operation
clockwise or counterclockwise to
The system automatically controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise change the current airflow mode.
the air inlet to supply the outside air
decrease the fan speed. To turn the
or recirculated inside air needed to I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Select from the following air delivery 0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost On hot days, use the automatic fan
modes: from the windshield more quickly. and automatic air delivery mode
H (Vent): Air is directed to the Air is directed to the windshield and settings and the vehicle will reach
instrument panel outlets. the side window outlets. In this the desired temperature more
mode, the system turns the quickly. The desired fan and air
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided recirculation mode off automatically delivery mode settings can still be
between the instrument panel and runs the air conditioning adjusted manually. Open the
outlets and the floor outlets. compressor unless the outside air is windows to let the hot inside air
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the at or below freezing. Recirculation escape, then close them. This helps
floor outlets with some air directed mode cannot be selected while in reduce the time it takes for the
to the windshield. defrost mode. This helps prevent vehicle to cool down and helps the
window fogging. system to operate more efficiently.
When this mode is selected, the
system turns the recirculation mode For best results, clear all snow and The air conditioning system
off. Recirculation mode cannot be ice from the windshield before removes moisture from the air, so a
selected while in floor mode. This is defrosting. small amount of water might drip
to help prevent window fogging. # (Air Conditioning): Press to under the vehicle while idling or
turn the air conditioning system on after turning off the engine.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the or off. An indicator light comes on to 8 (Outside Air): Press to turn
floor outlets, with some air directed show that the air conditioning is on. the outside air mode on. An
to the windshield and side window The air conditioning can be selected indicator light comes on to show
outlets. In this mode, the system in any mode as long as the fan is on that outside air is on. Air from
turns the recirculation mode off and and the outside temperature is outside the vehicle will circulate
runs the air conditioning compressor above freezing. A flashing indicator throughout the vehicle. The outside
unless the outside air is at or below light indicates that the air air mode can be used with all
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot conditioning compressor is currently modes, but it cannot be used with
be selected while in defog mode. not available. the recirculation mode. Pressing this
This helps prevent window fogging. button will cancel the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: recirculation mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn Rear Window Defogger Notice: Do not use anything
on the recirculation mode. An sharp on the inside of the rear
The rear window defogger uses a
indicator light comes on to show window. If you do, you could cut
warming grid to remove fog from the
that recirculation is on. This mode or damage the warming grid, and
rear window.
recirculates and helps to quickly the repairs would not be covered
cool or heat the air inside the The rear window defogger only by the vehicle warranty. Do not
vehicle. It can be used to prevent works when the ignition is in attach a temporary vehicle
outside air and odors from entering ON/RUN. license, tape, a decal, or anything
the vehicle. Avoid using the 1 (Rear Window Defogger): similar to the defogger grid.
recirculation mode during high Press to turn the rear window L orM Heated Front Seats (If
periods of humidity and cool outside defogger on or off. An indicator light Equipped): Press to heat the driver
temperatures since this may result on the button comes on to show that or passenger seat cushion and
in increased window fogging. it is activated. seatback. To turn off, press the
If window fogging is experienced, button until the indicator lights turn
select the defrost mode. The rear window defogger stays on
for approximately 10 minutes after off. See Heated Front Seats on
Recirculation mode is not available the button is pressed, unless the page 36.
in floor, defog, or defrost modes and ignition is turned to ACC/
will shut off automatically and Remote Start Climate Control
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. Operation
change to outside air. If the button is If turned on again, the defogger only
selected in any of these modes, the runs for approximately five minutes For vehicles with the remote start
indicator will flash. This helps before turning off. At higher vehicle feature, when it is activated, the
prevent window fogging and speeds, the defogger may stay on climate control system heats and
moisture building up inside the continuously. The defogger can also cools the inside of the vehicle using
vehicle. be turned off by turning off the the modes that were set before the
engine. vehicle was turned off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Vents Maintenance

Move the louvers on the air outlets
up or down to change the direction Passenger Compartment
of the airflow. The louvers do Air Filter
not turn.
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
Use the thumbwheels near each other airborne irritants from outside
vent to open and close off the air that is pulled into the vehicle.
airflow.
The filter should be replaced as part
Operation Tips of routine scheduled maintenance.
. Clear away any ice, snow, See Maintenance Schedule on
or leaves from the air inlets at page 113 for replacement intervals. 1. Remove the four screws from
the base of the vehicle that may To find out what type of filter to use, around the glove box and detach
block the flow of air into the see Maintenance Replacement the three inner clips from the
vehicle. Parts on page 1114. glove box.
. Do not use any non-GM The passenger compartment air 2. Lower the loosened glove box
approved hood deflectors that filter can be accessed by removing housing.
could adversely affect the the entire glove box.
performance of the system.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
. Do not insert objects into the air
outlets. This may affect the
operation of the outlet. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Unplug both wire cables and 4. Remove the air filter cover 5. Remove the filter cover and pull
remove the glove box. screw. out the old air filter.
6. Install the new air filter.
7. Reinstall the air filter cover.
Reconnect the wire cabling and
reinstall the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory Cruise Control

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Object Detection Systems
Parking over Things Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-31
Driving Information That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Rear Vision
Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust
Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Fuel
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-35
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Automatic Transmission Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-20 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-36
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Filling a Portable Fuel
Drive Systems Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Towing
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes General Towing
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Antilock Brake Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Driving Characteristics and
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Starting and Operating Ride Control Systems Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Traction Control Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Conversions and Add-Ons
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information an unbelted person is significantly city, freeway, and off-road driving,
more likely to die than a person as well as other hints for driving in
wearing a seat belt. In addition, various weather conditions.
Driver Behavior avoiding excessive speed, sudden
Whenever we drive, we are taking or abrupt turns, and drunken or Vehicle Design
on an important responsibility. This aggressive driving can help make
trips safer and avoid the possibility According to the U.S. Department of
is true for any motor vehicle
of a crash, especially a rollover Transportation, utility vehicles have
passenger car, van, truck, sport
crash. This section provides many a significantly higher rollover rate
utility. Driver behavior, the driving
useful tips to help you drive more than other types of vehicles. Utility
environment, and the vehicle's
safely. vehicles do have higher ground
design all affect how well a vehicle
clearance and a narrower track or
performs. But statistics show that
shorter wheelbase than passenger
the most important factor, by far, is Driving Environment cars, to make them more capable
how we drive.
You can also help avoid a rollover or for off-road driving. Specific design
Knowing how these three factors other type of crash by being characteristics like these give the
work together can help you prepared for driving in inclement driver a better view of the road, but
understand how your vehicle weather, at night, or during other also give utility vehicles a higher
handles and what you can do to times where visibility or traction may center of gravity than other types of
avoid many types of crashes, be limited, such as on curves, vehicles. This means that you
including a rollover crash. slippery roads, or hilly terrain. should not expect a utility vehicle to
The single most important thing is Unfamiliar surroundings can also handle the same way a vehicle with
this: everyone in the vehicle, have hidden hazards. a lower center of gravity, like a car,
including the driver, should buckle To help you learn more about would in similar situations.
up. See Safety Belts on page 39. In driving in different conditions, this But driver behavior factors are far
fact, most serious injuries and section contains information about more often the cause of a utility
fatalities to unbelted occupants can vehicle rollover than are
be reduced or prevented by the use environmental or vehicle factors.
of safety belts. In a rollover crash, I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safe driver behavior and

. Watch the road. Do not read,
understanding the environment in take notes, or look up { WARNING
which you will be driving can help information on phones or other
avoid a rollover crash in any type of electronic devices. Taking your eyes off the road too
vehicle, including utility vehicles. long or too often could cause a
. Designate a front seat
crash resulting in injury or death.
passenger to handle potential
Distracted Driving distractions. Focus your attention on driving.
Distraction comes in many forms . Become familiar with vehicle

and can take your focus from the features before driving, such as Refer to the Infotainment section for
task of driving. Exercise good programming favorite radio more information on using that
judgment and do not let other stations and adjusting climate system, including pairing and using
activities divert your attention away control and seat settings. a cell phone.
from the road. Many local Program all trip information into
governments have enacted laws any navigation device prior to Defensive Driving
regarding driver distraction. Become driving. Defensive driving means always
familiar with the local laws in . Wait until the vehicle is parked expect the unexpected. The first
your area. to retrieve items that have fallen step in driving defensively is to wear
To avoid distracted driving, always to the floor. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
keep your eyes on the road, hands page 39.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. to children. . Assume that other road users
. Do not use a phone in (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
. Keep pets in an appropriate other drivers) are going to be
demanding driving situations. carrier or restraint.
Use a hands-free method to careless and make mistakes.
place or receive necessary . Avoid stressful conversations Anticipate what they might do
phone calls. while driving, whether with a and be ready.
passenger or on a cell phone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
. Focus on the task of driving.
control a vehicle while driving. pedal harder to push down. If the
Drunk Driving engine stops, there will be some
Braking power brake assist but it will be
Death and injury associated with used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception
drinking and driving is a global Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to
tragedy. can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is brake pedal will be harder to push.
{ WARNING reaction time.
Steering
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In Hydraulic Power Steering
perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
Your vehicle has hydraulic power
judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
steering. It may require
a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
maintenance. See Power Steering
can have a serious or even distance in an emergency.
Fluid on page 1019.
fatal collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
If power steering assist is lost
drinking. include:
because the engine stops or
Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between because of a system malfunction,
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front the vehicle can be steered but may
Ride home in a cab; or if you are of you. require increased effort. See your
with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking. dealer if there is a problem.
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go

straight down the roadway.
. Take curves at a reasonable
speed.
Loss of Control
. Reduce speed before entering a
curve. Skidding
. Maintain a reasonable steady There are three types of skids that
speed through the curve. correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating . Braking Skid wheels are not
gently into the straightaway. rolling.
Steering in Emergencies
. Steering or Cornering Skid
too much speed or steering in a
. There are some situations when curve causes tires to slip and
steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force.
be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid too much
. Holding both sides of the throttle causes the driving
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
wheels to spin.
180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
a hand. then, if there is nothing in the Defensive drivers avoid most skids
way, steer the vehicle so that it by taking reasonable care suited to
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) existing conditions, and by not
allows steering while braking. straddles the edge of the
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement I
nfor
edge.
mati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help

these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. WARNING (Continued)
. Ease your foot off the Flowing or rushing water creates
accelerator pedal and steer the Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this
Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
occurs. Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not
. Slow down and adjust your of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
driving according to weather driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive
conditions. Stopping distance deepstanding or flowing water. through flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when { WARNING Hydroplaning
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
material on the road. Learn to They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
recognize warning clues such quick stop and could cause tires so they actually ride on the
as enough water, ice, or packed pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
snow on the road to make a lose control of the vehicle. wet enough and you are going fast
mirrored surface and slow enough. When the vehicle is
down when you have any doubt. After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle hydroplaning, it has little or no
. Try to avoid sudden steering, contact with the road.
wash, lightly apply the brake
acceleration, or braking, pedal until the brakes work There is no hard and fast rule about
including reducing vehicle speed normally. hydroplaning. The best advice is to
by shifting to a lower gear. Any slow down when the road is wet.
sudden changes could cause (Continued)
the tires to slide.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Other Rainy Weather Tips

. Keep your eyes moving scan
the road ahead and to the sides. WARNING (Continued)
Besides slowing down, other wet .
weather driving tips include: Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could
vehicle instruments often.
. Allow extra following distance. crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
. Pass with caution. Hill and Mountain Roads downhill slope.
. Keep windshield wiping Driving on steep hills or through
equipment in good shape. mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include: { WARNING
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
tread depth. See Tires on good shape. or with the ignition off is
page 1036. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, dangerous. The brakes will have
tires, cooling system, and to do all the work of slowing down
. Turn off cruise control.
transmission. and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
Highway Hypnosis . Shift to a lower gear when going
would then have poor braking or
down steep or long hills.
Always be alert and pay attention to even none going down a hill.
your surroundings while driving. Steering may also be affected
If you become tired or sleepy, find a { WARNING when ignition is off. You could
safe place to park the vehicle crash. Always have the engine
If you do not shift down, the
and rest. running and the vehicle in gear
brakes could get so hot that they
Other driving tips include: would not work well. You would when going downhill.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. then have poor braking or even
. Keep the interior (Continued)
temperature cool. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Stay in your own lane. Do not Drive with caution, whatever the Turn off cruise control on slippery
swing wide or cut across the condition. Accelerate gently so surfaces.
center of the road. Drive at traction is not lost. Accelerating too
speeds that let you stay in your quickly causes the wheels to spin Blizzard Conditions
own lane. and makes the surface under the Being stuck in snow can be a
. Be alert on top of hills; tires slick, so there is even less serious situation. Stay with the
something could be in your lane traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
(stalled car, accident). Try not to break the fragile traction. If possible, use Roadside
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance. See Roadside
. Pay attention to special road
wheels will spin and polish the Assistance Program (Mexico) on
signs (falling rocks area, winding
surface under the tires even more. page 137 or Roadside Assistance
roads, long grades, passing or
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
no-passing zones) and take The Antilock Brake System (ABS) page 1311. To get help and keep
appropriate action. improves vehicle stability during everyone in the vehicle safe:
hard stops on slippery roads, but
Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
. Turn on the hazard warning
on dry pavement. See Antilock flashers.
Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 924. . Tie a red cloth to an outside
Drive carefully when there is snow Allow greater following distance on mirror.
or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0C
slippery spots. Icy patches can { WARNING
occur on otherwise clear roads in
(32F) when freezing rain begins to shaded areas. The surface of a Snow can trap engine exhaust
fall, resulting in even less traction. curve or an overpass can remain icy under the vehicle. This may
Avoid driving on wet ice or in when the surrounding roads are cause exhaust gases to get
freezing rain until roads can be clear. Avoid sudden steering inside. Engine exhaust contains
treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while carbon monoxide (CO) which
on ice. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See wheels to free the vehicle when
cause unconsciousness and even Climate Control Systems in stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
death. the Index.
If stuck too severely for the traction
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about system to free the vehicle, turn the
carbon monoxide, see Engine traction system off and use the
. Clear away snow from around
Exhaust on page 919. rocking method. See Traction
the base of your vehicle,
Control System (TCS) on
especially any that is blocking
page 927.
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does the vehicle and then shut the engine { WARNING
not collect there. off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this If the vehicle's tires spin at high
. Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you speed, they can explode, and you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the or others could be injured. The
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle can overheat, causing an
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps. engine compartment fire or other
. Fully open the air outlets on damage. Spin the wheels as little
If it takes some time for help to
or under the instrument as possible and avoid going
arrive, now and then when you run
panel. the engine, push the accelerator above 56 km/h (35 mph).
. Adjust the climate control pedal slightly so the engine runs
system to a setting that faster than the idle speed. This
circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
(Continued) as possibleInfto
or save
mat
ionPr
ovifuel.
dedby:
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

it Out
It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the cause loss of control and a
front wheels. Turn off any traction crash. Overloading can also
vehicle capacity weight and
system. Shift back and forth shorten the life of the vehicle.
between R (Reverse) and a low includes the weight of all
forward gear, spinning the wheels occupants, cargo and all
as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information
transmission wear, wait until the Two labels on the vehicle show Label
wheels stop spinning before shifting how much weight it may
gears. Release the accelerator properly carry, the Tire and
pedal while shifting, and press Loading Information label and
lightly on the accelerator pedal the Certification label.
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions { WARNING
causes a rocking motion that could Do not load the vehicle any
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
heavier than the Gross
might need to be towed out. If the Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle does need to be towed out, (GVWR), or either the
see Towing the Vehicle on maximum front or rear Gross
page 1069. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
This can cause systems to A vehicle specific Tire and
break and change the way the Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the vehicle's center
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb
door open, you will find the label rear axle. See Certification passengers in your vehicle,
attached near the door lock Label later in this section. the amount of available cargo
post. The Tire and Loading and luggage load capacity is
Steps for Determining Correct
Information label shows the 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150)
Load Limit
number of occupant seating = 650 lbs).
positions (1), and the maximum 1. Locate the statement The
5. Determine the combined
vehicle capacity weight (2) in combined weight of
weight of luggage and cargo
kilograms and pounds. occupants and cargo should
being loaded on the vehicle.
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
That weight may not safely
XXX lbs on your vehicle's
Information label also shows the exceed the available cargo
placard.
tire size of the original and luggage load capacity
equipment tires (3) and the 2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4.
recommended cold tire inflation weight of the driver and
6. If your vehicle will be towing
pressures (4). For more passengers that will be riding
a trailer, the load from your
information on tires and inflation, in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to
see Tires on page 1036 and 3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this
Tire Pressure on page 1043. weight of the driver and manual to determine how this
There is also important loading passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo
information on the Certification XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
label. It tells you the Gross 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 942
and the Gross Axle Weight and luggage load capacity. for important information on
For example, if the XXX towing a trailer, towing safety
amountInfoequals
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
1400 lbs and
dedby:
rules and trailering tips.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg
(300 lbs). (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
(700 lbs). Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
seating positions. The combined the weight of the vehicle, all

weight of the driver, passengers, occupants, fuel, and cargo. WARNING (Continued)
and cargo should never exceed Never exceed the GVWR for the cause loss of control and a
the vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, or the Gross Axle crash. Overloading can also
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either shorten the life of the vehicle.
Certification Label
the front or rear axle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out. { WARNING
See Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit earlier in this Things inside the vehicle can
section. strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
{ WARNING crash.
Do not load the vehicle any
. Put things in the cargo
heavier than the Gross area of the vehicle. In the
Vehicle Weight Rating cargo area, put them as
Label Example (GVWR), or either the far forward as possible.
maximum front or rear Gross Try to spread the weight
A vehicle specific Certification
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). evenly.
label is attached to the lower
area of the center pillar (B-Pillar) This can cause systems to (Continued)
on the driver side of the vehicle. break and change the way the
The label tells the gross weight vehicle handles. This could
capacity of the vehicle, called (Continued)
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Do not tow a trailer during
WARNING (Continued) Starting and break-in. See Trailer Towing
Operating on page 942 for the trailer
. Never stack heavier towing capabilities of the
things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In vehicle and more
inside the vehicle so that information.
some of them are above Notice: The vehicle does not
Following breakin, engine speed
the tops of the seats. need an elaborate break-in. But it
and load can be gradually
will perform better in the long run
. Do not leave an increased.
if you follow these guidelines:
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
. Do not drive at any one Ignition Positions
constant speed, fast or slow,
. Secure loose items in the for the first 805 km
vehicle. (500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
. Do not leave a seat folded downshifting to brake or
down unless needed. slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
The ignition switch has four different
breaking-in guideline every
positions.
time you get new brake
linings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To shift out of P (Park), turn the The steering can bind with the 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ wheels turned off center. If this to P (Park), and turn the ignition
ACCESSORY and apply the regular happens, move the steering wheel to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
brake pedal. from right to left while turning the an automatic transmission, the
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this shift lever must be in P (Park) to
key to turn in the ignition could doesn't work, the vehicle needs turn the ignition switch to the
cause damage to the switch or service. LOCK/OFF position.
break the key. Use the correct Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See
key, make sure it is all the way in, vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 925
and turn it only with your hand. loss of power assist in the brake
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
{ WARNING
LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is emergency: moving may cause loss of power
stopped, turn the ignition switch to assist in the brake and steering
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags.
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. pressure. Do not pump the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) While driving, only shut the
brakes repeatedly. This may
will remain active. See Retained vehicle off in an emergency.
deplete power assist, requiring
Accessory Power (RAP) on increased brake pedal force.
page 917. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This position locks the ignition. This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
It also locks the steering wheel and vehicle is moving. After shifting turn the ignition to ACC/
the transmission. The key can only to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY.
be removed in LOCK/OFF. The shift brakes and steer the vehicle to a
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the safe location.
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is START: This is the position that Starting Procedure
the position in which you can starts the engine. When the engine 1. With your foot off the accelerator
operate some electrical accessories starts, release the key. The ignition pedal, turn the ignition to START.
or items plugged into the accessory switch returns to ON/RUN for When the engine starts, let go of
power outlets. driving. the key. The idle speed will slow
Use this position if the vehicle must A warning tone will sound when the down as the engine warms. Do
be pushed or towed. driver door is opened, the ignition is not race the engine immediately
ON (ON/RUN): This position can in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ after starting it. Operate the
be used to operate the electrical OFF, and the key is in the ignition. engine and transmission gently
accessories and to display some to allow the oil to warm up and
instrument cluster warning and Starting the Engine lubricate all moving parts.
indicator lights. This position can Move the shift lever to P (Park) or The vehicle has a
also be used for service and N (Neutral). The engine will not start Computer-Controlled Cranking
diagnostics, and to verify the proper in any other position. To restart the System. This feature assists in
operation of the malfunction engine when the vehicle is already starting the engine and protects
indicator lamp as may be required moving, use N (Neutral) only. components. If the ignition key is
for emission inspection purposes. turned to the START position,
The switch stays in this position Notice: Do not try to shift to and then released when the
when the engine is running. The P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine begins cranking, the
transmission is also unlocked in this If you do, you could damage the engine will continue cranking for
position. If you leave the key in the transmission. Shift to P (Park) a few seconds or until the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN only when the vehicle is stopped. vehicle starts. If the engine does
positions with the engine off, the not start and the key is held in
battery could be drained. You may START, cranking will be stopped
not be able to start the vehicle if the after 15 seconds to prevent
battery is allowed to drain for an cranking motor damage. To
extended period of time. prevent gear damage, this
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. If the vehicle starts briefly but

. Sunroof (if equipped)
Engine cranking can be stopped then stops again, repeat these . Radio
by turning the ignition switch to steps. This clears the extra
the ACC/ACCESSORY or gasoline from the engine. Do not The outside mirror, power windows
LOCK/OFF position. race the engine immediately and sunroof will function until a door
after starting it. Operate the is opened.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning engine and transmission gently The radio will function until the
the key to the START position until the oil warms up and driver door is opened.
immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts.
ended, can overheat and damage Notice: If you add electrical parts Shifting Into Park
the cranking motor, and drain the or accessories, you could change To shift into P (Park):
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds the way the engine operates. Any
between each try, to let the resulting damage would not be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
cranking motor cool down. covered by the vehicle warranty. set the parking brake. See
See Add-On Electrical Equipment Parking Brake on page 925 for
2. If the engine does not start after more information.
five to 10 seconds, especially in on page 945.
very cold weather (below 18C 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
or 0F), it could be flooded with Retained Accessory by holding in the button on the
too much gasoline. Try pushing Power (RAP) shift lever and pushing the lever
the accelerator pedal all the way all the way toward the front of
These vehicle accessories may be the vehicle.
to the floor and holding it there
used for up to 10 minutes after the
as you hold the key in START 3. Turn the ignition key to
ignition key is turned to the LOCK
for up to a maximum of LOCK/OFF.
position:
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to . Outside Mirror
allow the cranking motor to cool . Power Windows
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave an automatic Move the shift lever out of P (Park)
Engine Running transmission vehicle with the engine before you release the parking
running, be sure the vehicle is in brake.
P (Park) and the parking brake is
{ WARNING firmly set before you leave it. After
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
It can be dangerous to leave the you have moved the shift lever into yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle with the engine running. P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. the pressure from the parking pawl
It could overheat and catch fire. Then, see if you can move the shift in the transmission, so you can pull
lever away from P (Park) without the shift lever out of P (Park).
It is dangerous to get out of the first pushing the button. If you can, it
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully means that the shift lever was not
in P (Park) with the parking brake fully locked into P (Park). Shifting out of Park
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. The vehicle has an electronic shift
Torque Lock lock release system. The shift lock
Do not leave the vehicle when the
If you are parking on a hill and you release is designed to:
engine is running. If you have left
do not shift into P (Park) properly, . Prevent ignition key removal
the engine running, the vehicle
the weight of the vehicle may put unless the shift lever is in
can move suddenly. You or others too much force on the parking pawl
could be injured. To be sure the P (Park) with the shift lever
in the transmission. You may find it button fully released.
vehicle will not move, even when difficult to pull the shift lever out of
you are on fairly level ground, P (Park). This is called torque lock. . Prevent movement of the shift
always set the parking brake and To prevent torque lock, set the lever out of P (Park), unless the
move the shift lever to P (Park). parking brake and then shift into ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
See Shifting Into Park on P (Park) properly before you leave ACCESSORY and the regular
page 917. If you are towing a the driver seat. To find out how, see brake pedal is applied.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics Shifting Into Park on page 917.
and Towing Tips on page 939.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the Engine Exhaust
functional except in the case of an desired position.
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
{ WARNING
If the vehicle has an uncharged dealer or a professional towing Engine exhaust contains carbon
battery or a battery with low voltage, service. monoxide (CO) which cannot be
try charging or jump starting the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
battery. See Jump Starting on Parking over Things can cause unconsciousness and
That Burn even death.
To shift out of P (Park): Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
1. Apply the brake pedal. { WARNING . The vehicle idles in areas
2. Press the shift lever button. Things that can burn could touch with poor ventilation (parking
3. Move the shift lever to the hot exhaust parts under the garages, tunnels, deep snow
desired position. vehicle and ignite. Do not park that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
If you still are unable to shift out of over papers, leaves, dry grass,
. The exhaust smells or
P (Park): or other things that can burn.
sounds strange or different.
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
. The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
. The vehicle exhaust system
again. has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING (Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic
While Parked Transmission
. There are holes or openings
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from
engine running.
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
See Shifting Into Park on page 917
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 919.
coming into the vehicle:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
. Drive it only with the windows trailer, see Driving Characteristics
completely down. and Towing Tips on page 939.
. Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the There are several different positions
engine running in an enclosed for the automatic transmission.
area such as a garage or a
P (Park): This position locks the
building that has no fresh air
wheels. It is the best position to use
ventilation. when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
system. You have to fully apply the N (Neutral): In this position, the
{ WARNING regular brakes first and then press engine does not connect with the
the shift lever button before you can wheels. To restart the engine when
It is dangerous to get out of the shift from P (Park) when the ignition the vehicle is already moving, use
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot N (Neutral) only. Also, use
in P (Park) with the parking brake shift out of P (Park), ease pressure N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. on the shift lever and push the shift being towed.
Do not leave the vehicle when the lever all the way into P (Park) as
engine is running. If you have left you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button
{ WARNING
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others and move the shift lever into Shifting into a drive gear while the
could be injured. To be sure the another gear. See Shifting out of engine is running at high speed is
Park on page 918. dangerous. Unless your foot is
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the
always set the parking brake and back up. vehicle could move very rapidly.
move the shift lever to P (Park). You could lose control and hit
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
See Shifting Into Park on people or objects. Do not shift
while the vehicle is moving
page 917 and Driving forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine
Characteristics and Towing Tips transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed.
on page 939. not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
after the vehicle is stopped. N (Neutral) with the engine
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine. To rock the vehicle back and forth to running at high speed may
The vehicle has an automatic get out of snow, ice, or sand without damage the transmission. The
transmission shift lock control damaging the transmission, see If repairs would not be covered by
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 99. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for Notice: Spinning the tires or

normal driving with the automatic holding the vehicle in one place
transmission. It provides the best on a hill using only the
fuel economy. If you need more accelerator pedal may damage
power for passing, and you are: the transmission. The repair will
. Going less than about 55 km/h not be covered by the vehicle
(35 mph), push the accelerator warranty. If you are stuck, do not
pedal about halfway down. spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph), vehicle in place.
push the accelerator all the
way down. Manual Mode
Downshifting the transmission in To use this feature:
slippery road conditions could result Electronic Range Select
in skidding, see Skidding under (ERS) Mode 1. Move the shift lever to
Loss of Control on page 95. ERS mode allows you to choose the M (Manual).
M (Manual): This position allows top-gear limit of the transmission 2. Press the plus/minus button
you to change gears similar to a and the vehicle's speed while located on the shift lever, to
manual transmission. If the vehicle driving downhill or towing a trailer. increase or decrease the gear
has this feature, see Manual Mode The vehicle has an electronic shift range available.
on page 922. position indicator within the
When you shift from D (Drive) to
instrument panel cluster. When
M (Manual), the transmission will
using the ERS mode a number will
shift to a pre-determined lower gear
display in place of the D (Drive),
range. The highest gear available
indicating the current gear range
for this pre-determined range is
that has been selected.
displayed in the DIC. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: page 523. The number displayed in
the DIC is the highest gear that the Fuel Economy Mode When fuel economy mode is on:
transmission will be allowed to . The transmission will upshift
operate in. This means that all The vehicle may have a fuel
economy mode. When engaged, sooner, and downshift later.
gears below that number are
available. For example, when fuel economy mode can improve the . The torque converter will lock
4 (Fourth) is shown, 1 (First) through vehicle's fuel economy. up sooner, and stay on longer.
4 (Fourth) gears are automatically . The gas pedal will be less
shifted by the vehicle. The sensitive.
transmission will not shift into
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
. The vehicles driving
used or you shift back into D (Drive). performance will be more
conservative.
While in M (Manual), the
transmission will prevent shifting to
. The vehicle's computers will
a lower gear range if the engine more aggressively shut off fuel
speed is too high. You have a brief to the engine under deceleration.
period of time to slow the vehicle. . The engine idle speed will be
If vehicle speed is not reduced lower.
within the time allowed, the lower
gear range shift will not be Do not use fuel economy mode
completed. You must further slow Pressing the eco button by the shift while towing.
the vehicle, then press the (Minus) lever will engage fuel economy
button to the desired lower gear mode. When activated, the eco light
range. in the instrument cluster will come
on. See Fuel Economy Light on
Automatic Engine Grade Braking is
page 520. Pressing the button a
not available when the ERS is
second time will turn fuel economy
active. It is available in D (Drive).
mode off.
While using the ERS, cruise control
can be used. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
Vehicles with this feature always System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
send engine power to all four are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels. It is fully automatic, and wheels is about to stop rolling, the
System (ABS), an advanced
adjusts itself as needed for road computer will separately work the
electronic braking system that helps
conditions. brakes at each wheel.
prevent a braking skid.
When using a compact spare tire on ABS can change the brake pressure
When the vehicle begins to drive
an AWD vehicle, the system to each wheel, as required, faster
away, ABS checks itself.
automatically detects the compact than any driver could. This can help
A momentary motor or clicking noise
spare and disables AWD. To restore you steer around the obstacle while
might be heard while this test is
AWD operation and prevent braking hard.
going on, and it might even be
excessive wear on the system, noticed that the brake pedal moves As the brakes are applied, the
replace the compact spare with a a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates
full-size tire as soon as possible. on wheel speed and controls
See Compact Spare Tire on braking pressure accordingly.
page 1064.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 518.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake Center (DIC) messages. See Brake
the time needed to get a foot up to System Messages on page 528. In
the brake pedal or always decrease case of insufficient electrical power,
stopping distance. If you get too the EPB cannot be applied or
close to the vehicle in front of you, released.
there will not be enough time to Before leaving the vehicle, check
apply the brakes if that vehicle the parking brake status light to
suddenly slows or stops. Always insure the parking brake is applied.
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS. EPB Apply
Using ABS The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold applied by momentarily lifting up on
the brake pedal down firmly and let the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
ABS work. You might hear the ABS the parking brake status light and
pump or motor operating and feel The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the brake system warning light will be
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is on. While the brake is being applied,
normal. EPB is in the center console. The
EPB can always be activated, even the status light will flash until full
Braking in Emergencies if the ignition is OFF. To prevent apply is reached. Once fully applied,
draining the battery, avoid repeated the DIC message PARK BRAKE
ABS allows you to steer and brake SET will be displayed. If the status
at the same time. In many cycles of the EPB system when the
engine is not running. light does not come on, or remains
emergencies, steering can help flashing, have the vehicle serviced.
more than even the very best The system has a parking brake Do not drive the vehicle if the
braking. status light and a parking brake parking brake status light is flashing.
warning light. See Electric Parking See your dealer. See Electric
Brake Light on page 517. There are Parking Brake Light on page 517.
also several Driver Information
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the EPB is applied while the on the EPB switch and hold it in the If the parking brake warning light is
vehicle is in motion, a chime will up position. Full application of the on, the EPB has detected an error
sound, and the DIC message parking brake by the EPB system in another system and is operating
RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH may take a longer period of time with reduced functionality. To
will be displayed. The vehicle will than normal when this light is on. release the EPB when this light is
decelerate as long as the switch is Continue to hold the switch until the on, push down on the EPB switch
held in the up position. Releasing parking brake status light remains and hold it in the down position.
the EPB switch during deceleration on. If the parking brake warning light EPB release may take a longer
will release the parking brake. If the is on, see your dealer. period of time than normal when this
switch is held in the up position until If the EPB fails to apply, the rear light is on. Continue to hold the
the vehicle comes to a stop, the wheels should be blocked to switch until the parking brake status
EPB will remain applied. prevent vehicle movement. light is off. If the light is on, see your
If the parking brake status light dealer.
flashes continuously, the EPB is EPB Release Notice: Driving with the parking
only partially applied or released, To release the EPB, place the brake on can overheat the brake
or there is a problem with the EPB. ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or system and cause premature
The DIC message SERVICE ON/RUN position, apply and hold wear or damage to brake system
PARKING BRAKE will be displayed. the brake pedal, and push down parts. Make sure that the parking
If this light flashes continuously, momentarily on the EPB switch. brake is fully released and the
release the EPB, and attempt to If you attempt to release the EPB brake warning light is off before
apply it again. If this light continues without the brake pedal applied, a driving.
to flash, do not drive the vehicle. chime will sound, and the DIC
See your dealer. message STEP ON BRAKE TO
If the parking brake warning light is RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
on, the EPB has detected an error displayed. The EPB is released
in another system and is operating when the parking brake status light
with reduced functionality. To apply is off.
the EPB when this light is on, lift up I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic EPB Release Ride Control Systems It is recommended to leave the

system on for normal driving
The EPB will automatically release if
conditions, but it may be necessary
the vehicle is running, placed into Traction Control to turn the system off if the vehicle
gear and an attempt is made to System (TCS) is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
when the EPB is applied, to The vehicle has a Traction Control
page 99.
preserve parking brake lining life. System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
This is useful in slippery road
For maximum EPB force when
conditions. The system operates
towing a trailer or parking on a hill,
only if it senses that any of the drive
pull the EPB switch twice. If you are
wheels are spinning or beginning to
towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
lose traction. When this happens,
see Driving Characteristics and
TCS applies the brakes to limit
Towing Tips on page 939.
wheel spin and also reduces engine
power. The system may be heard or The TCS/StabiliTrak button is on the
felt while it is working, but this is instrument panel.
normal. To turn off and on TCS, press and
release the StabiliTrak button g.
The appropriate message displays
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Ride Control System
Messages on page 532.
If the system is limiting wheel spin
This light will flash when TCS is when the button is pressed, the
limiting wheel spin. system will not turn off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Adding non-dealer accessories can helps the driver maintain directional This light is on the instrument
affect the vehicle's performance. control of the vehicle in most driving cluster.
See Accessories and Modifications conditions. It will flash when StabiliTrak is both
on page 102. StabiliTrak activates when the on and activated.
Brake Pedal Override computer senses a difference If the system fails to turn on or
between the intended path and the activate, this light will be on solid.
This vehicle has this feature that direction the vehicle is actually
limits engine torque when the brake When the light is on solid, the
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively system will not assist the driver
pedal is applied. If there is one foot applies braking pressure at any one
on the brake pedal and the other maintain directional control of the
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the vehicle. Adjust your driving
foot on the accelerator, the engine driver with keeping the vehicle on
rpm will only climb to slightly more accordingly.
the intended path.
than idle speed. The StabiliTrak system
When the vehicle is started and automatically comes on whenever
This feature is enabled at vehicle begins to move, the system
start. Press and release the TCS/ the vehicle is started. To assist the
performs several diagnostic checks driver with vehicle directional
StabiliTrak button g to disable or to ensure that there are no control, especially in slippery road
enable this feature and TCS. The problems. The system may be conditions, the system should
appropriate message will display on heard or felt while it is working. This always be left on. StabiliTrak can be
the DIC. See Ride Control System is normal and does not mean there turned off if needed.
Messages on page 532. is a problem with the vehicle.
StabiliTrak System
The vehicle has a stability control
system called StabiliTrak which
combines antilock brake, traction,
and stability control systems and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The Traction Control System (TCS)/ Cruise Control

StabiliTrak button is on the WARNING (Continued)
instrument panel. With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h cause excessive wheel slip, and
TCS can be turned off or on by you could lose control. Do not use
(25 mph) or more without keeping
pressing and releasing the TCS/ cruise control on slippery roads.
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
StabiliTrak button g. To disable both control does not work at speeds
StabiliTrak and TCS, press and hold below 40 km/h (25 mph). Setting Cruise Control
the button g until g turns on solid in On vehicles with the StabiliTrak
the instrument cluster. The feature, the system may begin to
appropriate DIC message displays. limit wheel spin while you are using
See Ride Control System Messages cruise control. If this happens, the
on page 532. cruise control will automatically
It is recommended to leave the disengage. See StabiliTrak System
system on for normal driving on page 928.
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
{ WARNING
and you want to rock the vehicle to Cruise control can be dangerous
attempt to free it. where you cannot drive safely at
If cruise control is being used when a steady speed. So, do not use
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise the cruise control on winding
control automatically disengages. roads or in heavy traffic. E (On/Off): Press to turn the
The cruise control can be cruise control system on and off. An
Cruise control can be dangerous indicator light comes on.
re-engaged when road conditions on slippery roads. On such roads,
allow. See Cruise Control on fast changes in tire traction can
page 929.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
RES+ (Resume/Accel): Move the Resuming a Set Speed

. To increase the speed in small
thumbwheel up to resume a set amounts, move the thumbwheel
If the cruise control is set at a up toward RES+ briefly and then
speed or to accelerate to a higher desired speed and then the brakes
speed. release it. Each time this is
are applied, the cruise control is done, the vehicle goes about
SET (Set/Coast): Press the disengaged. The indicator light on 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
thumbwheel to set a speed or move the instrument cluster goes out
the thumbwheel down to decrease when cruise control is no longer
. Use the accelerator pedal to
the speed. engaged. To return to the previously reach the desired speed and
set speed, press the thumbwheel up move the thumbwheel toward
Setting Cruise Control toward RES+ briefly when the SET. The new desired speed
If the cruise control is on when not vehicle has reached a speed of must be greater than the
in use, it could get bumped and go about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more. previous set speed by at least
into cruise when not desired. Keep 8 km/h (5 mph).
This accelerates the vehicle to the
the cruise control switch off when previously selected speed. Reducing Speed While Using
cruise is not being used. Cruise Control
Increasing Speed While Using
1. Press E to turn cruise control Cruise Control If the cruise control system is
on. The indicator light on the already engaged:
button comes on. To increase the cruise speed while
using cruise control:
. Move the thumbwheel toward
2. Get to the speed desired. SET and hold until the desired
. Move the thumbwheel up toward lower speed is reached, then
3. Press the thumbwheel and RES+ and hold it until the
release it. release it.
vehicle accelerates to the
4. Take your foot off the accelerator desired speed, and then release
. To slow down in very small
pedal. the switch. amounts, move the thumbwheel
toward SET briefly. Each time
When the brakes are applied, the this is done, the vehicle goes
cruise control shuts off. about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

Using Cruise Control There are two ways to disengage
Use the accelerator pedal to the cruise control:
Systems
increase the vehicle's speed. When . Step lightly on the brake pedal;
you take your foot off the pedal, the Ultrasonic Parking Assist
when cruise control disengages,
vehicle will slow down to the the indicator light on the If available, the Ultrasonic Rear
previously set cruise control speed. instrument cluster goes out. Parking Assist (URPA) system
Using Cruise Control on Hills assists the driver with parking and
. Press E to turn off the cruise avoiding objects while in
How well the cruise control works control system. R (Reverse). URPA operates at
on hills depends upon the vehicle's speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
speed, load, and the steepness of Erasing Speed Memory
The sensors on the rear bumper are
the hills. When going up steep hills, The cruise control set speed used to detect objects up to
you might have to step on the memory is erased when the cruise 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and
accelerator pedal to maintain the control or the ignition is turned off. at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
vehicle's speed. When going and below liftgate level.
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to maintain the
vehicle's speed. For some vehicles { WARNING
the transmission may automatically The URPA system does not
downshift when going down hills to detect children, pedestrians,
help maintain the vehicle's speed.
bicyclists, animals, or objects
When the brakes are applied, the
below the bumper or that are too
cruise control shuts off.
close or too far from the vehicle.
It is not available at speeds
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To be detected, objects must be at PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE

WARNING (Continued) least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground OWNERS MANUAL: This
and below liftgate level. Objects message can occur under the
prevent injury, death, or vehicle must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from following conditions:
damage, even with URPA, always the rear bumper. This detection . The ultrasonic sensors are not
check the area around the vehicle distance may be less during warmer
and check all mirrors before clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
or humid weather. bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
backing.
Turning the System On and Off ice, and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
How the System Works The system can be disabled through on page 1072.
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
URPA comes on automatically when See Park Assist under Driver
. The park assist sensors are
the shift lever is moved into Information Center (DIC) on covered by frost or ice. Frost or
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds page 523 for more information. ice can form around and behind
to indicate the system is working. the sensors and may not always
URPA defaults to the on setting be seen; this can occur after
URPA operates only at speeds less each time the vehicle is started.
than 8 km/h (5 mph). washing the vehicle in cold
When the System Does Not weather. The message may not
An obstacle is indicated by audible clear until the frost or ice has
beeps. The interval between the Seem to Work Properly
melted.
beeps becomes shorter as the The following messages may be
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. displayed on the DIC:
. A trailer was attached to the
When the distance is less than vehicle, or an object was
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this hanging out of the liftgate during
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
message occurs, take the vehicle to the last drive cycle. Once the
continuous tone for five seconds.
your dealer to repair the system. object is removed, URPA will
return to normal operation.
. A tow bar is attached to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
vehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Take Turning the Rear Vision Camera
the vehicle to your dealer to WARNING (Continued) System Off or On
repair the system.
vehicle using only the RVC To turn off the RVC system, press
. Other conditions, such as and hold the power button on the
screen, during longer, higher
vibrations from a jackhammer or back side of the rearview mirror.
speed backing maneuvers,
the compression of air brakes on The RVC display is now disabled.
a very large truck, are affecting or where there could be cross
system performance. traffic. Failure to use proper care To turn the RVC system on again,
before backing may result in press and hold the power button.
injury, death, or vehicle damage. The RVC system display is now
Rear Vision enabled and the display will appear
Always check behind and around
Camera (RVC) the vehicle before backing. in the mirror normally.
The vehicle may have an RVC Rear Vision Camera Location
system. Read this entire section The RVC system is designed to
before using it. help the driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
{ WARNING the vehicle. When the key is in the
ON/RUN position and the driver
The RVC system does not display shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, the video image automatically
animals, or any other object appears on the inside rearview
located outside the camera's field mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
of view, below the bumper, R (Reverse), the video image
or under the vehicle. Perceived automatically disappears from the
distances may be different from inside rearview mirror.
actual distances. Do not back the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The camera is on the liftgate, above 1. View displayed by the camera.

. It is dark.
the license plate. . The sun or the beam of
The area displayed by the camera is headlights is shining directly into
limited and does not display objects the camera lens.
that are close to either corner or . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
under the bumper. The area builds up on the camera lens.
displayed can vary depending on Clean the lens, rinse it with
vehicle orientation or road water, and wipe it with a soft
conditions. The distance of the cloth.
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
. The back of the vehicle is in an
1. View displayed by the camera. accident, the position and
The following illustration shows the mounting angle of the camera
2. Corner of the rear bumper.
field of view that the camera can change or the camera can
provides. When the System Does Not be affected. Be sure to have the
Seem To Work Properly camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
The RVC system may not work
dealer.
properly or display a clear image if:
. There are extreme temperature
. The RVC is turned off. See
changes.
Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off earlier in this
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuel Recommended Fuel

{ CAUTION
Use of the recommended fuel is an Use regular unleaded gasoline with
important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or Do not use fuel containing
maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less methanol. It can corrode metal
keep the engine clean and maintain than 87, an audible knocking noise, parts in the fuel system and also
optimum vehicle performance, we commonly referred to as spark damage plastic and rubber parts.
recommend using TOP TIER knock, might be heard when driving. That damage would not be
Detergent Gasolines. See If this occurs, use a gasoline rated covered under the vehicle
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP at 87 octane or higher as soon as warranty.
TIER Detergent Gasolines. possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine Some gasolines that are not
needs service. reformulated for low emissions can
contain an octane-enhancing
Prohibited Fuels additive called
Gasolines containing oxygenates, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
such as ethers and ethanol, as well tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
as reformulated gasolines are gasolines with MMT as they can
available in some cities. If these reduce spark plug life and affect
gasolines comply with the emission control system
previously described specification, performance. The malfunction
then they are acceptable to use. indicator lamp may turn on. If this
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and occurs, see your dealer for service.
other fuels containing more than
If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, 15% ethanol must be used only in Gasoline Specifications
E85 or flex fuel can be used in the flex fuel vehicles. Some gasolines contain an
vehicle. See Fuel E85 (85%
octane-enhancing additive called
Ethanol) on page 936.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend control system to work properly. Many service stations will not have
against the use of gasolines Some gasoline does not contain an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives sufficient quantities of additive to available. Those stations that do
on page 936 for additional keep fuel injectors and intake valves have E85 should have a label
information. clean. To make up for this lack of indicating ethanol content. Do not
detergency, it is recommended that use the fuel if the ethanol content is
Fuels in Foreign GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, greater than 85%.
part number 88861013 be added to
Countries the fuel tank at every engine oil
At a minimum, E85 should meet
specifications. By definition, this
If planning to drive in countries change or every 15 000 km, means that fuel labeled E85 will
outside the U.S. or Canada, the whichever occurs first. have an ethanol content between
proper fuel might be hard to find.
70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank
Check regional auto club or fuel Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) with fuel mixtures that do not meet
retail brand websites for availability
Vehicles that are ethanol fuel specifications can affect driveability
in the country where driving. Never
capable can use either unleaded and could cause the malfunction
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
gasoline or ethanol fuel containing indicator lamp to come on.
methanol, or any other fuel not
recommended. Costly repairs up to 85% ethanol (E85). For all It is best not to alternate repeatedly
caused by use of improper fuel other vehicles, use only the between gasoline and E85. If you
would not be covered by the vehicle unleaded gasoline described under do switch fuels, it is recommended
warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 935. that you add as much fuel as
We encourage the use of E85 in possible do not add less than 11 L
Fuel Additives vehicles that are designed to use it. (3 gal) when refueling. You should
The ethanol in E85 is a renewable drive the vehicle immediately after
Gasoline should contain detergent refueling for at least 11 km (7 mi) to
fuel, meaning it is made from
additives that help prevent engine allow the vehicle to adapt to the
renewable sources such as corn
and fuel system deposits from change in ethanol concentration.
and other crops.
forming. Clean fuel injectors and
intake valves will allow the emission I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
E85 has less energy per liter Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)
(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when { WARNING . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
you are using gasoline. See Filling cap is opened too quickly.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
the Tank on page 937.
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is
Notice: Some additives are not death. more likely in hot weather.
compatible with E85 fuel and can Open the fuel cap slowly and
. To help avoid injuries to you
harm the vehicle's fuel system. wait for any hiss noise to stop
and others, read and follow
Do not add anything to E85. then unscrew the cap all
all the instructions on the fuel
Damage caused by additives the way
pump island.
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. . Turn off the engine when
refueling.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains . Keep sparks, flames, and
methanol. Do not use fuel smoking materials away
containing methanol. It can from fuel.
corrode metal parts in the fuel . Do not leave the fuel pump
system and also damage plastic unattended.
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the . Do not reenter the vehicle
vehicle warranty. while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The tethered fuel cap is located improperly installed. This would Filling a Portable Fuel
behind a hinged fuel door on the allow fuel to evaporate into the
driver side of the vehicle. On some atmosphere. See Malfunction
Container
vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry, Indicator Lamp on page 514.
the fuel door is locked and unlocked { WARNING
when the vehicle doors are locked
and unlocked.
{ WARNING Filling a portable fuel container
If a fire starts while you are while it is in the vehicle can cause
To remove the fuel cap, turn it fuel vapors that can ignite either
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by by static electricity or other
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
shutting off the pump or by means. You or others could be
released too soon, it will spring back
notifying the station attendant. badly burned and the vehicle
to the right. To avoid fuel contact on
the painted surface of the vehicle Leave the area immediately. could be damaged. Always:
when filling the fuel tank, place the . Use approved fuel
tethered cap on the fuel filler door. Notice: If a new fuel cap is containers.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not needed, be sure to get the right . Remove the container from
top off or overfill the tank and wait a type of cap from your dealer. The the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
few seconds after you have finished wrong type of fuel cap might not bed before filling.
pumping before removing the fit properly, might cause the . Place the container on the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted malfunction indicator lamp to
ground.
surfaces as soon as possible. See light, and could damage the fuel
Exterior Care on page 1072. tank and emissions system. See (Continued)
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure page 514.
the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Do not tow a trailer during the
WARNING (Continued) Towing first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent
damage to the engine, axle or
General Towing other parts.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container Information . Then, during the first 800 km
before dispensing fuel, and Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) trailer towing, do not
keep it in contact with the fill been designed for the vehicle. drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
opening until filling is Contact your dealer or trailering do not make starts at full throttle.
complete. dealer for assistance with preparing . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read but M (Manual Mode) is
. Fill the container no more the entire section before towing a
than 95% full to allow for recommended. See Manual
trailer. Mode on page 922. Use a lower
expansion.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see gear if the transmission shifts
. Do not smoke, light matches, Towing the Vehicle on page 1069. too often.
or use lighters while For towing the vehicle behind
pumping fuel. another vehicle such as a motor { WARNING
. Avoid using cell phones or home, see Recreational Vehicle
other electronic devices. Towing on page 1069. When towing a trailer, exhaust
gases may collect at the rear of
Driving Characteristics the vehicle and enter if the
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
and Towing Tips window is open.
Driving with a Trailer When towing a trailer:
When towing a trailer: (Continued)
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply
specifically
I
nfor
mat
ito
o trailer
nPr dedby: towing.
ovi
Before starting, check all trailer hitch This can help to avoid situations
WARNING (Continued) parts and attachments, safety that require heavy braking and
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, sudden turns.
. Do not drive with the liftgate, tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
trunk/hatch, or rear-most electric brakes, start the Passing
window open. combination moving and then apply More passing distance is needed
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand when towing a trailer. Because the
or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
panel. During the trip, check occasionally farther beyond the passed vehicle
. Also adjust the Climate to be sure that the load is secure before returning to the lane.
Control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer Backing Up
that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
See Climate Control Hold the bottom of the steering
Systems in the Index. Towing with a Stability Control wheel with one hand. To move the
System trailer to the left, move your hand to
For more information about the left. To move the trailer to the
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be right, move your hand to the right.
Exhaust on page 919. Always back up slowly and,
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the if possible, have someone
Towing a trailer requires a certain trailer, which mainly occurs during guide you.
amount of experience. The cornering. This is normal when Making Turns
combination you are driving is towing heavier trailers.
longer and not as responsive as the Notice: Making very sharp turns
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with Following Distance while trailering could cause the
the handling and braking of the rig Stay at least twice as far behind the trailer to come in contact with the
before setting out for the open road. vehicle ahead as you would when vehicle. The vehicle could be
driving the vehicle without a trailer. damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When turning with a trailer, make Driving on Grades Parking on Hills

wider turns than normal so the
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
gear before starting down a long or { WARNING
steep downgrade. If the
objects. Use the turn signal well in Parking the vehicle on a hill with
transmission is not shifted down, the
advance and avoid jerky or sudden the trailer attached can be
brakes might have to be used so
maneuvers. dangerous. If something goes
much that they would get hot and no
Turn Signals When Towing a longer work well. wrong, the rig could start to move.
Trailer People can be injured, and both
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
the vehicle and the trailer can be
The turn signal indicators on the Use a lower gear if the transmission
damaged. When possible, always
instrument cluster flash whenever shifts too often.
park the rig on a flat surface.
signaling a turn or lane change. When towing at high altitude on
Properly hooked up, the trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant
lamps also flash, telling other boils at a lower temperature than at If parking the rig on a hill:
drivers the vehicle is turning, normal altitudes. If the engine is 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
changing lanes or stopping. turned off immediately after towing not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
When towing a trailer, the arrows on at high altitude on steep uphill the wheels into the curb if facing
the instrument cluster flash for turns grades, the vehicle could show downhill or into traffic if facing
even if the bulbs on the trailer are signs similar to engine overheating. uphill.
burned out. Check occasionally to To avoid this, let the engine run
2. Have someone place chocks
be sure the trailer bulbs are still while parked, preferably on level
under the trailer wheels.
working. ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before 3. When the wheel chocks are in
turning the engine off. If the place, release the brake pedal
overheat warning comes on, see until the chocks absorb the load.
Engine Overheating on page 1018.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then especially important in trailer Weight of the Trailer
apply the parking brake and shift operation are automatic
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
into P (Park). transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and Speed, altitude, road grades,
5. Release the brake pedal.
brake system. Inspect these before outside temperature, special
Leaving After Parking on a Hill and during the trip. equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal Check periodically to see that all
must be considered. See Weight of
while you: hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
the Trailer Tongue later in this
. Start the engine. Engine Cooling When Trailer section for more information.
. Shift into a gear. Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated
. Release the parking brake. The cooling system may temporarily assuming only the driver is in the
overheat during severe operating tow vehicle and it has all the
2. Let up on the brake pedal. conditions. See Engine Overheating required trailering equipment. The
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is on page 1018. weight of additional optional
clear of the chocks. equipment, passengers and cargo in
Trailer Towing the tow vehicle must be subtracted
4. Stop and have someone pick up from the maximum trailer weight.
and store the chocks. Three important considerations
Use the following chart to determine
have to do with weight:
Maintenance When Trailer how much the vehicle can weigh,
Towing . The weight of the trailer based upon the vehicle model and
. The weight of the trailer tongue options.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See the . The total weight on the vehicle's
Maintenance Schedule on tires
page 113. Things that are
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD 2.4L L4 Engine 3.23 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 438 kg (5,375 lbs)
AWD 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)
2WD 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering If there are a lot of options,
information or advice. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is will also reduce the trailer weight the
an important weight to measure vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
because it affects the total gross the tongue load must be added to
weight of the vehicle. The Gross the GVW because the vehicle will
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the be carrying that weight, too. See
curb weight of the vehicle, any Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (1) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: loaded trailer weight (2).
After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's bumper-type hitches to it. Use
trailer and then the tongue, Tires only a frame-mounted hitch that
separately, to see if the weights are does not attach to the bumper.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These . Will any holes be made in the
might be made by moving some body of the vehicle when the
items around in the trailer. numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle trailer hitch is installed? If there
Trailering may be limited by the Load Limits on page 910 for more are, then be sure to seal the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue information. Do not go over the holes when the hitch is removed.
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause GVW limit for the vehicle, or the If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR GAWR, including the weight of the water, and deadly carbon
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or trailer tongue. If using a weight monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle distributing hitch, do not go over the may get into the vehicle. See
Weight Rating). The effect of rear axle limit before applying the Engine Exhaust on page 919.
additional weight may reduce the weight distribution spring bars.
trailering capacity more than the Safety Chains
total of the additional weight. Towing Equipment Always attach chains between the
It is important that the vehicle does vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
not exceed any of its ratings Hitches safety chains under the tongue of
GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum It is important to have the correct the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large from contacting the road if it
The only way to be sure it is not trucks going by, and rough roads becomes separated from the hitch.
exceeding any of these ratings is to are a few reasons why the right Always leave just enough slack so
weigh the vehicle and trailer. hitch is needed. the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer Brakes Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
A loaded trailer that weighs more Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is The vehicle has an airbag system.
adequate for the weight of the Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
trailer. Be sure to read and follow Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
the instructions for the trailer brakes Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Some electrical Vehicle on page 329 and Adding
so they are installed, adjusted and
equipment can damage the Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
maintained properly.
vehicle or cause components to Vehicle on page 329.
Because the vehicle has antilock not work and would not be
brakes, do not try to tap into the covered by the warranty. Always
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. check with your dealer before
If you do, both brake systems will adding electrical equipment.
not work well, or at all.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-1
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23

Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission Shift
Electrical System
Electrical System
Lock Control Function Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fuses and Circuit
General Information Ignition Transmission Lock Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Engine Compartment Fuse
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24 Instrument Panel Fuse
Vehicle Checks Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Wheels and Tires
Headlamp Aiming Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Engine Compartment All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Bulb Replacement Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-38
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Front Turn Signal and Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Stoplamps, and Back-Up Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Pressure Monitor
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information Damage to vehicle components

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 resulting from modifications or the
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 For service and parts needs, visit installation or use of nonGM
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive certified parts, including control
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 genuine parts and trained and module or software modifications, is
Uniform Tire Quality supported service people. not covered under the terms of the
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 vehicle warranty and may affect
Wheel Alignment and Tire Accessories and remaining warranty coverage for
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 affected parts.
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-55
Modifications
GM Accessories are designed to
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Adding nondealer accessories or
complement and function with other
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 making modifications to the vehicle
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 systems on the vehicle. See your
can affect vehicle performance and
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-64 dealer to accessorize the vehicle
safety, including such things as
using genuine GM Accessories
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Jump Starting installed by a dealer technician.
handling, emissions systems,
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 aerodynamics, durability, and Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Towing electronic systems like antilock Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-69 brakes, traction control, and stability page 329.
Recreational Vehicle control. These accessories or
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Appearance Care by the vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-3
Vehicle Checks Keep a record with all parts receipts

and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed.
Doing Your Own
Notice: Even small amounts of
Service Work contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
{ WARNING contaminants to contact the
fluids, reservoir caps,
It can be dangerous to work on or dipsticks.
your vehicle if you do not have
the proper knowledge, service Hood
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures To open the hood:
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
and consult the service manual lift up on the secondary hood
for your vehicle before doing any release lever.
service work.
3. Lift the hood.
To close the hood:
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service 1. Before closing the hood, be sure
manual. It tells you much more that all the filler caps are
1. Pull the handle with this symbol. properly installed.
about how to service the vehicle It is located below the instrument
than this manual can. panel to the left of the steering 2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
This vehicle has an airbag system. wheel. above the vehicle and release it
Before attempting to do your own so it fully latches.
service work, see Airbag System 3. Check to make sure the hood is
Check on page 331. firmly closed. Repeat the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
process if necessary.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-5
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See

page 1011. Brakes on page 1020.
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. 8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Power Steering Fluid on See Jump Starting on
page 1019. page 1065.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of 9. Battery on page 1023.
View). See Cooling System on 10. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
page 1013. and Pressure Cap. See
4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Checking Coolant under
View). See Checking Engine Engine Coolant on page 1014.
Oil under Engine Oil on 11. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
page 108. See Jump Starting on
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When page 1065.
to Add Engine Oil under Engine 12. Engine Compartment Fuse
Oil on page 108. Block on page 1030.
6. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Adding Washer
Fluid under Washer Fluid on
page 1020.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-6 Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 7. Windshield Washer Fluid Engine Cover

page 1011. Reservoir. See Adding Washer
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of Fluid under Washer Fluid on
View). See When to Add Engine page 1020.
Oil under Engine Oil on 8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
page 108. Brakes on page 1020.
3. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
(Out of View). See Power See Jump Starting on
Steering Fluid on page 1019. page 1065.
4. Engine Cover. See Engine 10. Battery on page 1023.
Cover on page 107. 11. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.
5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of See Checking Coolant under
View). See Checking Engine Engine Coolant on page 1014. Engine Cover (3.0L V6)
Oil under Engine Oil on 12. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
page 108. 1. Oil Fill Cap
See Jump Starting on
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of page 1065. 2. Engine Cover Bolt
View). See Cooling System on 13. Engine Compartment Fuse 3. Engine Cover
page 1013. Block on page 1030. To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
2. Remove the engine cover
bolt (2).
3. Raise the engine cover (3) to
release it from the retainers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-8 Vehicle Care
4. Lift and remove the engine

. Always dispose of engine oil
cover. properly. See What to Do with { WARNING
Used Oil in this section.
5. Reverse Steps 14 to reinstall The engine oil dipstick handle
the engine cover. Checking Engine Oil may be hot; it could burn you.
It is a good idea to check the engine Use a towel or glove to touch the
Engine Oil oil level at each fuel fill. In order to dipstick handle.
To ensure proper engine get an accurate reading, the vehicle
performance and long life, careful must be on level ground. The 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
attention must be paid to engine oil. engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. with a paper towel or cloth, then
Following these simple, but See Engine Compartment Overview push it back in all the way.
important steps will help protect on page 104 for the location of the Remove it again, keeping the tip
your investment: engine oil dipstick. down, and check the level.
. Always use engine oil approved Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential: When to Add Engine Oil
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See 1. If the engine has been running
Selecting the Right Engine Oil recently, turn off the engine and
in this section. allow several minutesfor the oil
. Check the engine oil level to drain back into the oil pan.
regularly and maintain the Checking the oil level too soon
proper oil level. See Checking after engine shutoff will not
Engine Oil and When to Add provide an accurate oil level
Engine Oil in this section. reading. If the oil is below the MIN
(minimum) mark, add 1 L (1 qt) of
. Change the engine oil at the the recommended oil and then
appropriate time. See Engine Oil recheck the level. See Selecting
Life System on page 1010. the Right Engine Oil in this section
for an explanation of what kind of oil
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-9
to use. For engine oil crankcase Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Failure to use the
capacity, see Capacities and recommended engine oil or
Selecting the right engine oil
Specifications on page 122. equivalent can result in engine
depends on both the proper oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. damage not covered by the
specification and viscosity grade.
Oil levels above or below the vehicle warranty. Check with your
See Recommended Fluids and
acceptable operating range dealer or service provider on
Lubricants on page 1112.
shown on the dipstick are harmful whether the oil is approved to the
to the engine. If you find that you Specification dexos1 specification.
have an oil level above the Use and ask for licensed engine oils Viscosity Grade
operating range, i.e., the engine with the dexos1 approved
has so much oil that the oil level SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the upper mark that grade for the vehicle. Do not use
meeting the requirements for the
shows the proper operating other viscosity grade oils such as
vehicle should have the dexos1
range, the engine could be SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
approved certification mark. This
damaged. You should drain out certification mark indicates that the Cold Temperature Operation: In an
the excess oil or limit driving of oil has been approved to the dexos1 area of extreme cold, where the
the vehicle and seek a service specification. temperature falls below 29C
professional to remove the (20F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
excess amount of oil. used. An oil of this viscosity grade
See Engine Compartment Overview will provide easier cold starting for
on page 104 for the location of the the engine at extremely low
engine oil fill cap. temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
Add enough oil to put the level always select an oil of the correct
somewhere in the proper operating specification. See Specification
range. Push the dipstick all the way earlier in this section for more
back in when through. information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your OIL SOON or CHANGE ENGINE
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil OIL NOW message displays. See
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never Engine Oil Messages on page 530.
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground, message displays, change the oil as
dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or soon as possible within the next
is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking 1 000 km (600 mi). If the CHANGE
engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil. ENGINE OIL NOW message
Engine oil system flushes are not displays, change the oil as soon as
recommended and could cause Engine Oil Life System possible. It is possible that, if driving
engine damage not covered by the under the best conditions, the oil life
vehicle warranty. When to Change Engine Oil system might indicate that an oil
This vehicle has a computer system change is not necessary for up to a
What to Do with Used Oil year. The engine oil and filter must
that indicates when to change the
Used engine oil contains certain engine oil and filter. This is based be changed at least once a year
elements that can be unhealthy for on a combination of factors which and, at this time, the system must
your skin and could even cause include engine revolutions, engine be reset. Your dealer has trained
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on temperature, and miles driven. service people who will perform this
your skin for very long. Clean your Based on driving conditions, the work and reset the system. It is also
skin and nails with soap and water, mileage at which an oil change is important to check the oil regularly
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or indicated can vary considerably. For over the course of an oil drain
properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil life system to work properly, interval and keep it at the proper
containing used engine oil. See the the system must be reset every time level.
manufacturer's warnings about the the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset
use and disposal of oil products. accidentally, the oil must be
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
indicates that Inan
for
oil
mat
i
change
onPr
ovi
dedby:
is
Vehicle Care 10-11
since the last oil change. The oil life system can also be reset Notice: Use of the incorrect
Remember to reset the oil life as follows: automatic transmission fluid may
system whenever the oil is changed. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN damage the vehicle, and the
with the engine off. damages may not be covered by
How to Reset the Engine Oil the vehicle warranty. Always use
Life System 2. Fully press and release the the automatic transmission fluid
Reset the system whenever the accelerator pedal three times listed in Recommended Fluids
engine oil is changed so that the within five seconds. and Lubricants on page 1112.
system can calculate the next If the OIL LIFE REMAINING value is For the 2.4L L4 and 3.0L
engine oil change. To reset the not 100%, the system needs to be V6 engines, the transmission fluid
system: reset again. will not reach the end of the dipstick
1. Press the DIC vehicle unless the transmission is at
information button to display OIL Automatic Transmission operating temperature. If you need
LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. Fluid to check the transmission fluid level,
See Driver Information Center please take the vehicle to your
(DIC) on page 523 and Engine It is not necessary to check the dealer.
Oil Messages on page 530. transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Press the DIC Set/Reset button reason for fluid loss. If a leak
for five seconds to reset the oil occurs, take the vehicle to the See Engine Compartment Overview
life at 100%. dealer and have it repaired as soon on page 104 for the location of the
Be careful not to reset the oil life as possible. engine air cleaner/filter.
display accidentally at any time Change the fluid and filter at the
other than after the oil is intervals listed in Maintenance
changed. It cannot be reset Schedule on page 113, and be sure
accurately until the next oil to use the transmission fluid listed in
change. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants Ion
nf
or
page
mat
ionPr
ovi
1112.
dedby:
10-12 Vehicle Care
When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace: 3. Remove the screws (3) on the
Cleaner/Filter sides of the air cleaner cover
assembly.
Inspect and replace the air cleaner/
filter at the scheduled maintenance 4. Turn the cover upward to
intervals. See the Maintenance disengage the cover hinges.
Schedule on page 113. If driving in 5. Lift and remove the air cleaner
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the cover assembly and air filter
filter at each engine oil change. element.
How to Inspect the Engine Air 6. Inspect or replace the air filter
Cleaner/Filter element.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, If the air filter element is dirty,
remove the filter from the vehicle you should replace it.
and lightly shake the filter to release 2.4L L4 Engine Shown, 3.0L Wipe all dust from inside of the
loose dust and dirt. If the filter V6 Engine Similar housing and inspect the air
remains covered with dirt, a new 1. Electrical Connector cleaner and air outlet duct for
filter is required. Never use cracks, cuts, and deterioration.
compressed air to clean the filter. 2. Air Duct Clamp
The air outlet duct must be
3. Screws replaced if damaged.
1. Disconnect the electrical 7. Reverse Steps 15 to reinstall
connector (1). the engine air cleaner/filter cover
2. Loosen the air duct clamp (2) on and air duct hose.
the air duct hose. Disconnect the
air duct hose.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-13
Cooling System
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is 3.0L V6 Engine

off, dirt can easily get into the 1. Engine Fans (Out of View)
engine, which could damage it. 2.4L L4 Engine
Always have the air cleaner/filter 1. Engine Fan (Out of View) 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
in place when you are driving. Pressure Cap
2. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-14 Vehicle Care
If the coolant inside the coolant If the engine is overheating, the fan 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
surge tank is hot, do not do anything should be running. If it is not, the occurs first, if only DEX-COOL
else until it cools down. The vehicle vehicle needs service. Turn off the extended life coolant is added.
should be parked on a level surface. engine. The following explains the cooling
The coolant level should be Notice: Engine damage from system and how to add coolant
between the MIN and MAX lines. running the engine without when it is low. If there is a problem
If it is not, you may have a leak at coolant is not covered by the with engine overheating, see Engine
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, warranty. Overheating on page 1018.
radiator, water pump, or somewhere Notice: Using coolant other than A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
else in the cooling system. DEX-COOL can cause premature water and DEX-COOL coolant will:
engine, heater core, or radiator
{ WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine
. Give freezing protection down to
37C (34F).
coolant could require changing
Heater and radiator hoses, and sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) . Give boiling protection up to
other engine parts, can be very or 24 months, whichever occurs 129C (265F).
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, first. Any repairs would not be . Protect against rust and
you can be burned. covered by the vehicle warranty. corrosion.
Do not run the engine if there is a Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
. Help keep the proper engine
leak. If you run the engine, it temperature.
could lose all coolant. That could vehicle.
cause an engine fire, and you
. Let the warning lights and
could be burned. Get any leak Engine Coolant gauges work as they should.
fixed before you drive the vehicle. The cooling system in the vehicle is Notice: Using coolant other than
filled with DEX-COOL engine DEX-COOL can cause premature
coolant. This coolant is designed to engine, heater core, or radiator
If there seems to be no leak, with
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or corrosion. In addition, the engine
the engine on, check to see if the
coolant could require changing
engine cooling fan(s) is running. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-15
sooner than DEX-COOL. Any Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or

repairs would not be covered by WARNING (Continued) additives are used in the vehicle's
the vehicle warranty. Always use cooling system, the vehicle could
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant With plain water or the wrong be damaged. Use only the proper
in the vehicle. mixture, the engine could get too mixture of the engine coolant
hot but you would not get the listed in this manual for the
What to Use overheat warning. The engine cooling system. See
Use a mixture of one-half clean, could catch fire and you or Recommended Fluids and
drinkable water and one-half others could be burned. Use a Lubricants on page 1112 for
DEX-COOL coolant which will not 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable more information.
damage aluminum parts. If you use water and DEX-COOL coolant. Never dispose of engine coolant by
this coolant mixture, you do not putting it in the trash, pouring it on
need to add anything else. the ground, or into sewers, streams,
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could or bodies of water. Have the coolant
{ WARNING overheat and be badly damaged. changed by an authorized service
The repair cost would not be center, familiar with legal
Adding only plain water or some requirements regarding used
covered by the vehicle warranty.
other liquid to the cooling system coolant disposal. This will help
Too much water in the mixture
can be dangerous. Plain water protect the environment and your
can freeze and crack the engine,
and other liquids, can boil before radiator, heater core, and other health.
the proper coolant mixture will. parts.
The coolant warning system is set Checking Coolant
for the proper coolant mixture. If coolant has to be added more The coolant surge tank is located on
than four times a year, have the the driver side of the engine
(Continued) dealer check the vehicle cooling compartment. See Engine
system. Compartment Overview on
page 104 for more information on
location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-16 Vehicle Care
drinkable water and DEX-COOL

{ WARNING { WARNING coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system,
Turning the surge tank pressure You can be burned if you spill including the coolant surge tank
cap when the engine and radiator coolant on hot engine parts. pressure cap, is cool before doing it.
are hot can allow steam and Coolant contains ethylene glycol, See Engine Overheating on
scalding liquids to blow out and and it will burn if the engine parts page 1018 for more information.
burn you badly. Never turn the are hot enough. Do not spill
surge tank pressure cap even a
little when the engine and
coolant on a hot engine.
{ WARNING
radiator are hot. When replacing the pressure cap, Steam and scalding liquids from a
make sure it is hand-tight and fully hot cooling system can blow out
The vehicle must be on a level seated. and burn you badly. They are
surface. When the engine is cold, under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant level should be between
How to Add Coolant to the the coolant surge tank pressure
the MIN and MAX lines. Coolant Surge Tank cap even a little they can
Notice: This vehicle has a come out at high speed. Never
Adding Coolant turn the cap when the cooling
specific coolant fill procedure.
If more coolant is needed, add the Failure to follow this procedure system, including the coolant
proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture could cause the engine to surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
at the coolant surge tank, but only overheat and be severely Wait for the cooling system and
when the engine is cool. See below damaged. coolant surge tank pressure cap
for instructions on How to Add to cool if you ever have to turn
If a problem yet has not been found,
Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank. the pressure cap.
check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
between the MIN and MAX lines,
add a 50/50 mixture
I
nfor
mat
i of
onPr
ovi
declean,
dby:
Vehicle Care 10-17
Turn the pressure cap slowly

{ WARNING { WARNING counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If a hiss
Adding only plain water or some You can be burned if you spill is heard, wait for that to stop.
other liquid to the cooling system coolant on hot engine parts. This will allow any pressure
can be dangerous. Plain water Coolant contains ethylene glycol still left to be vented out the
and other liquids, can boil before and it will burn if the engine parts discharge hose.
the proper coolant mixture will. are hot enough. Do not spill
The coolant warning system is set coolant on a hot engine. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
Notice: In cold weather, water
surge tank pressure cap and
can freeze and crack the engine,
upper radiator hose, is no
radiator, heater core and other
longer hot.
parts. Use the recommended 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
coolant and the proper coolant the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture. mixture, to between the MIN and
MAX lines.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-18 Vehicle Care
4. With the coolant surge tank Engine Overheating WARNING (Continued)

pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the There is a coolant temperature
upper radiator hose can be felt warning light on the instrument could get badly burned. Stop the
getting hot. Watch out for the panel. See Engine Coolant engine if it overheats, and get out
engine cooling fan. Temperature Warning Light on of the vehicle until the engine has
page 520. cooled.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank If Steam is Coming from the
may be lower. If the level is Engine Notice: Driving the vehicle when
lower, add more of the proper there is no coolant in the coolant
overflow recovery bottle, can
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
{ WARNING badly damage the engine. The
level reaches between the MIN Steam from an overheated engine costly repairs would not be
and MAX lines. can cause serious injury, even if covered by the vehicle warranty.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be the hood is opened just a little. If No Steam is Coming from
sure the pressure cap is Stay away from the engine if the Engine
hand-tight. steam is seen or heard coming
from it. Just turn it off and get If there is an engine overheat
Check the level in the surge tank warning, but no steam can be seen
when the cooling system has cooled everyone away from the vehicle
or heard, the problem may not be
down. If the coolant is not at the until it cools down. Wait until there
too serious. Sometimes the engine
proper level, repeat Steps 13 and is no sign of steam or coolant
can get a little too hot when the
reinstall the pressure cap. If the before opening the hood. vehicle:
coolant still is not at the proper level If driving continues when the .
when the system cools down again, Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
engine is overheated, the liquids
see the dealer. in it can catch fire. Someone
. Stops after high-speed driving.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-19

. Idles for long periods in traffic. If there is still no sign of steam, idle loss in this system could indicate a
. Tows a trailer. the engine for three minutes while problem. Have the system inspected
parked. If the warning continues, and repaired.
If there is an overheat warning with turn off the engine and get everyone
no sign of steam, try this for a out of the vehicle until it cools down. How to Check Power Steering
minute or so: Fluid
The decision may be made to not lift
1. If there is an a/c and it is on, turn the hood but to get service help To check the power steering fluid:
it off. right away. 1. Turn the ignition off and let the
2. Turn on the heater to full hot at engine compartment cool down.
the highest fan speed and open Power Steering Fluid 2. Remove the engine cover,
the windows as necessary.
if required. See Engine Cover on
3. Try to minimize engine load. If in page 107.
a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral);
otherwise, shift to the highest 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
gear possible while driving. reservoir clean.
If the overheat warning is no longer 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
on, the vehicle can be driven. Just dipstick with a clean rag.
to be safe, drive slowly for about See Engine Compartment Overview 5. Replace the cap and completely
10 minutes. If the warning does not on page 104 for reservoir location. tighten it.
come back on, drive normally. When to Check Power Steering 6. Remove the cap again and look
If the warning continues and the Fluid at the fluid level on the dipstick.
vehicle is not stopped, pull over, It is not necessary to regularly The fluid level should be within the
stop, and park the vehicle check power steering fluid unless a area indicated on the dipstick when
right away. leak in the system is suspected or the engine is cold. If necessary, add
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid only enough fluid to bring the level
within the area indicated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use Adding Windshield Washer

. Fill the washer fluid tank only
Fluid three-quarters full when it is
To determine what kind of fluid to very cold. This allows for
use, refer to Recommended Fluids fluid expansion if freezing
and Lubricants on page 1112. occurs, which could damage
Always use the proper fluid. the tank if it is
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid completely full.
may damage the vehicle and the . Do not use engine coolant
damages may not be covered by (antifreeze) in the windshield
the vehicle's warranty. Always washer. It can damage the
use the correct fluid listed in Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until windshield washer system
Recommended Fluids and and paint.
Lubricants on page 1112. the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 104. Brakes
Washer Fluid
Notice This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
What to Use brake pads have built-in wear
. When using concentrated indicators that make a high-pitched
When windshield washer fluid is washer fluid, follow the
needed, be sure to read the warning sound when the brake pads
manufacturer instructions for are worn and new pads are needed.
manufacturer instructions before adding water.
use. If operating the vehicle in an The sound can come and go or be
area where the temperature can fall
. Do not mix water with heard all the time the vehicle is
below freezing, use a fluid that has ready-to-use washer fluid. moving, except when applying the
sufficient protection against Water can cause the solution brake pedal firmly.
freezing. to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-21
Brake linings should always be If this is not done, the brakes might
{ WARNING replaced as complete axle sets. not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
The brake wear warning sound Brake Pedal Travel wrong for the vehicle, can change
means that soon the brakes will See your dealer if the brake pedal the balance between the front and
not work well. That could lead to does not return to normal height, rear brakes for the worse. The
a crash. When the brake wear or if there is a rapid increase in braking performance expected can
warning sound is heard, have the pedal travel. This could be a sign change in many other ways if the
vehicle serviced. that brake service might be wrong replacement brake parts are
required. installed.
Notice: Continuing to drive with Brake Adjustment
worn-out brake pads could result Brake Fluid
in costly brake repair. Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
Some driving conditions or climates the brakes adjust for wear.
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly Replacing Brake System Parts
applied. This does not mean
The braking system on a vehicle is
something is wrong with the brakes.
complex. Its many parts have to be
Properly torqued wheel nuts are of top quality and work well together The brake master cylinder reservoir
necessary to help prevent brake if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
pulsation. When tires are rotated, braking. The vehicle was designed indicated on the reservoir cap. See
inspect brake pads for wear and and tested with top-quality brake Engine Compartment Overview on
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the parts. When parts of the braking page 104 for the location of the
proper sequence to torque system are replaced, be sure to get reservoir.
specifications in Capacities and new, approved replacement parts.
Specifications on page 122.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-22 Vehicle Care
There are only two reasons why the

brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use
installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
. A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic Notice
hydraulic system can also cause system.
a low fluid level. Have the brake . Using the wrong fluid can
hydraulic system fixed, since a badly damage brake
leak means that sooner or later When the brake fluid falls to a low hydraulic system parts. For
the brakes will not work well. level, the brake warning light comes example, just a few drops of
on. See Brake System Warning mineral-based oil, such as
Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 516. engine oil, in the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. hydraulic system can
If fluid is added when the linings are What to Add
damage brake hydraulic
worn, there will be too much fluid Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid system parts so badly that
when new brake linings are from a sealed container. they will have to be replaced.
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
Always clean the brake fluid Do not let someone put in
as necessary, only when work is
reservoir cap and the area around the wrong kind of fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic system.
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-23

. If brake fluid is spilled on the Vehicle Storage noise is heard. A fluid loss could
vehicle's painted surfaces, indicate a problem. Have it
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to { WARNING inspected and repaired.
spill brake fluid on the Batteries have acid that can burn Starter Switch Check
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
you and gas that can explode.
immediately.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
{ WARNING
Battery page 1065 for tips on working When you are doing this
Refer to the replacement number around a battery without inspection, the vehicle could
shown on the original battery label getting hurt. move suddenly. If the vehicle
when a new battery is needed. See moves, you or others could be
Engine Compartment Overview on injured.
page 104 for battery location. Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative () cable from the
battery to keep the battery from 1. Before starting this check, be
{ WARNING running down. sure there is enough room
Extended Storage: Remove the around the vehicle.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead black, negative () cable from the 2. Firmly apply both the parking
and lead compounds, chemicals battery or use a battery trickle brake and the regular brake.
known to the State of California to charger. See Parking Brake on
cause cancer and reproductive page 925.
harm. Wash hands after handling. All-Wheel Drive Do not use the accelerator
When to Check Lubricant pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
It is not necessary to regularly starts.
check the transfer case fluid unless
a leak is suspected
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
or an unusual
dedby:
10-24 Vehicle Care
3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Contact your dealer if service is
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on required.
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 925.
If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular Park Brake and P (Park)
position, contact your dealer for
service.
brake immediately if the vehicle Mechanism Check
begins to move.
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the { WARNING
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the When you are doing this check,
Function Check regular brake, try to move the the vehicle could begin to move.
shift lever out of P (Park) with You or others could be injured
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
When you are doing this your dealer for service. of the vehicle in case it begins to
inspection, the vehicle could roll. Be ready to apply the regular
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission brake at once should the vehicle
moves, you or others could be Lock Check begin to move.
injured.
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
sure there is enough room position. your foot on the regular brake, set
around the vehicle. It should be the parking brake.
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
. To check the parking brake's
lever is in P (Park). holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
. The ignition key should come N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
out only inInLOCK/OFF.
f
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-25
pressure from the regular brake damage that occurs would not be 3. Push the new blade assembly
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is covered by your warranty. Do not securely on the wiper arm until
held by the parking brake only. allow the wiper arm to touch the the release lever clicks into
. To check the P (Park) windshield. place.
mechanism's holding ability: Front Wiper Blade 4. Lower the wiper arm.
With the engine running, shift to Replacement
P (Park). Then release the Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
parking brake followed by the To replace the windshield wiper To replace the rear wiper blade:
regular brake. blade:
Contact your dealer if service is 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
required. windshield.
Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear and cracking.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 113.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. For proper type and
length, see Maintenance 2. Push the release lever (2) to 1. Lift the rear wiper arm (1) from
Replacement Parts on page 1114. disengage the hook and push the window.
the wiper arm (1) out of the
Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to
blade assembly (3).
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-26 Vehicle Care
2. Turn the bottom edge of the Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement

blade assembly (2) slightly away
from the underside of the Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
wiper arm. should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 1029.
3. Apply downward pressure to the
blade assembly and remove the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulbchanging procedure
from the wiper arm. If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
4. Install the new wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper arm and blade Halogen Bulbs
assembly to the rest position on
the window.
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of the headlamp
bulbs, use the following procedure.
To replace the parking/turn signal
lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps on page 1027.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-27
1. Open the hood. See Hood on Fog Lamps

page 103.
To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
1. Locate the fog lamp located
under the front fascia.
2. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
5. Disconnect the electrical 4. Install the new bulb by turning it
connector from the bulb clockwise into the assembly.
assembly.
5. Reconnect the electrical
2. Remove the filler panel 6. Turn the bulb assembly connector.
fasteners (1) and remove the counterclockwise to remove it
filler panel. from the housing. Front Turn Signal and
3. Remove the three screws (2)
retaining the headlamp
7. Replace the old bulb with a Parking Lamps
new one.
assembly. To replace a front turn signal or
8. Reverse Steps 16 to reinstall. parking lamp bulb:
4. Pull the headlamp assembly
straight forward releasing the 1. Follow Steps 14 under
retaining studs from the Headlamps on page 1026 to
grommets. access the front turn signal or
parking lamp.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-28 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
2. Turn the bulb to be replaced 2. Remove the two screws holding

counterclockwise to remove it in the taillamp assembly.
from the headlamp assembly. 3. Slide the taillamp assembly
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb rearward and away from the
socket assembly. vehicle.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb 4. Turn the bulb socket being
1. Back-Up Lamp
socket assembly. replaced counterclockwise to
2. Turn Signal Lamp disconnect it.
5. Insert the bulb assembly into the
headlamp assembly. 3. Stoplamp/Taillamp 5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb
6. Turn the bulb assembly 4. Taillamp socket.
clockwise until seated. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 6. Push the new bulb into the bulb
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the on page 28. socket.
headlamp assembly. 7. Reverse Steps 24 to reinstall
the taillamp assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-29
License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket Replacement Bulbs

counterclockwise and pull the
To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight out of the socket. Exterior Lamp Bulb
Number
1. Remove the two screws holding 4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
each of the license plate lamps socket and turn it clockwise to Back-Up Lamp 921
to the fascia. lock it into place. Front Fog Lamp H11
5. Push and turn the license plate Front Turn Signal/ 3157K
lamp back through the fascia Parking Lamp
opening.
Headlamps
6. Reinstall the two screws holding
the license plate lamp to the High-beam 9005
fascia. or HB3
Low-beam/DRL 9006
or HB4
License Plate Lamp 168LL
Rear Stoplamp, and 7443
Taillamp
2. Turn and pull the license plate
Rear Turn 3757 NAK
lamp forward through the fascia
Signal Lamp
opening.
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-30 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit fuses. This greatly reduces the
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an chance of circuit overload and fire
remain off.
electrical system overload. caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers There are two fuse blocks the
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to engine compartment fuse block, and
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield the instrument panel fuse block.
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools To identify and check fuses and
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. relays, refer to the Fuse Usage
greatly reduces the chance of circuit Although the circuit is protected Chart on the inside surface of the
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload fuse panel door or cover.
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. Engine Compartment
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow Fuse Block
from the windshield before using the
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers. The engine compartment fuse block
of the identical size and rating. is on the right side of the engine
If the overload is caused by an compartment, near the battery.
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed. Notice: Spilling liquid on any
same amperage fuse can be electrical component on the
borrowed. Choose some feature of vehicle may damage it. Always
the vehicle that is not needed to use keep the covers on any electrical
and replace it as soon as possible. component.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-31
Fuses Usage
BATT2 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 2
BATT3 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 3
BCM Body Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
PWR TRN Module/Powertrain
ENG SNSR Miscellaneous
Engine Sensors
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage EPB Electric Parking
with all of the fuses, relays, and Brake
features shown. A/C Heater, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning FAN1 Cooling Fan 1
Fuses Usage
System FAN3 Cooling Fan 3
ABS Antilock Brake
BATT1 Instrument Panel FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps
System
Fuse Block Main
Feed 1 FRT WPR Front Wiper Motor
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/ PRK Parking Lamps FRT Front Fog Lamps
Vacuum Pump LP RH* (Right) (Europe Park FOG RLY
Lamps)
HDLP Headlamp Washer FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/Vacuum
WASHER PWM FAN Pulse Width PUMP RLY Pump Relay
Modulation Fan
HI High-Beam HDLP Headlamp Washer
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) REAR Rear Window WSHR RLY
DEFOG Defogger
HI High-Beam HI High-Beam
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right) REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor BEAM RLY Headlamps
HORN Horn SPARE Not Used LO Low-Beam
BEAM RLY Headlamps
HTD Heated Washer STOP Stoplamps
WASH/MIR Fluid/Heated Mirrors LAMP PWR/ Powertrain
TRN RLY
IGN COIL A Ignition Coil A STRTR Starter
REAR Rear Window
IGN COIL B Ignition Coil B TCM Transmission
DEFOG Defogger
Control Module
LO Low-Beam RLY
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) TRLR Trailer Parking
STOP Stoplamps
PRK LP Lamps
LO Low-Beam LAMP RLY
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right)
Relays Usage STRTR RLY Starter
PRK LP LH Parking Lamps (Left)
FAN1 RLY Cooling Fan 1 WPR Wiper Control
PRK LP RH Parking Lamps CNTRL RLY
(Right) FAN2 RLY Cooling Fan 2
WPR Wiper Speed
FAN3 RLY I
Cooling Fan 3
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SPD RLY
Vehicle Care 10-33
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
on the passenger side of the lower
console.
Pull the latch of the fuse box cover

straight back to access the fuses.
The vehicle may not have all of the Fuses Usage

fuses, relays, and features shown.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
AMP Amplifier
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

APO JACK Auxiliary Power BCM Body Control FRT WSR Front Washer
(CONSOLE) Outlet Jack (TRN SIG) Module (Turn
FSCM Fuel System
Signal)
APO JACK Auxiliary Power Control Module
(REAR Outlet Jack Rear BCM Body Control
FSCM Fuel System
CARGO) Cargo (VBATT) Module (Battery
VENT SOL Control Module
Voltage)
AWD/VENT All-Wheel Drive/ Vent Solenoid
Ventilation CIGAR Cigarette Lighter
HEATING Heating Mat Switch
BCM (CTSY) Body Control CIM Communications MAT SW
Module (Courtesy) Integration Module
HTD Heated Seat
BCM Body Control CLSTR Instrument Cluster SEAT PWR Power
(DIMMER) Module (Dimmer)
DRL Daytime Running HVAC BLWR Heating,
BCM (INT Body Control Lamps Ventilation, and Air
LIGHT) Module (Interior Conditioning
DR/LCK Driver Door Lock
Light) Blower
DRVR Driver Power Seat
BCM Body Control IPC Instrument Panel
PWR SEAT
(PRK/TN) Module (Parking/ Cluster
Turn Signal) DRV/ Driver Power
ISRVM/RCM Inside Rearview
PWR WNDW Window
BCM (STOP) Body Control Mirror/Remote
Module (Stoplamp) F/DOOR Fuel Door Lock Compass Module
LOCK
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-35
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

KEY Key Capture SDM (IGN 1) Safety Diagnosis ACC/ Accessory/Run
CAPTURE Module (Ignition 1) RAP RLY Accessory Power
L/GATE Liftgate SPARE Spare CIGAR Cigarette and
APO Auxiliary Power
LOGISTIC Logistic Mode S/ROOF Sunroof
JACK RLY Outlet
MODE
S/ROOF Sunroof Battery
RUN/ Run/Crank
OSRVM Outside Rearview BATT
CRNK RLY
Mirror
SSPS Speed Sensitive
RUN RLY Run
PASS Passenger Power Power Steering
PWR WNDW Window
STR/ Steering Wheel
PWR DIODE Power Diode WHL SW Switch
PWR/ Power Moding TRLR Trailer
MODING
TRLR BATT Trailer Battery
RADIO Radio
XBCM Export Body
RR FOG Rear Defogger Control Module
RUN 2 Power Battery Key XM/ SiriusXM Satellite
On Run HVAC/DLC Radio (If
Equipped)/Heating,
RUN/CRNK Run Crank
Ventilation, and Air
SDM (BATT) Safety Diagnosis Conditioning/Data
Module (Battery) Link Connection
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-36 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 910. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ WARNING Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-37

. Use only radial ply tires of the
All-Season Tires Winter Tires same size, load range, and
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not, originally, speed rating as the original
all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires.
designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
Winter tires with the same speed
performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
rating as the original equipment tires
and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
specific tire performance criteria driving on snow or ice-covered
tires with a lower speed rating are
have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
chosen, never exceed the tire's
molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
maximum speed capability.
equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
of this TPC code, which will page 1051. Summer Tires
be MS. With winter tires, there may be This vehicle may come with high
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction, performance summer tires. These
the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter tires have a special tread and
snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter compound that are optimized for
expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle maximum dry and wet road
adequate performance for most handling and braking. performance. This special tread and
winter driving conditions, but they compound will decrease
If using winter tires: performance in cold climates, and
may not offer the same level of
traction or performance as winter . Use tires of the same brand and on ice and snow. We recommend
tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel installing winter tires on the vehicle
See Winter Tires on page 1037. positions. if frequent driving in cold
temperatures or on snow or ice
covered roads is expected. See
Winter Tires on page 1037.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-38 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the digits represent the week
Tire Size illustration later in this (0152) and the last two digits,
Useful information about a tire is section. the year. For example, the third
molded into its sidewall. The week of the year 2010 would
examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
passenger vehicle tire and a of 0310.
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number
exceed all federal safety (TIN). The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
combination of letters and Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to
manufactured I
nf
date.
or
mat
ionPr
ovi
The first two
dedby:
grade tires based on three
Vehicle Care 10-39
performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation
traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that
resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the
see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to
Grading on page 1053. The compact spare tire is for support that load.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
support that load. Tire on page 1064 and If a Tire information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 1056. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(3) Tire Identification Number page 1043.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture.
(1) Tire Ply Material : The type Specification): Original
of cord and number of plies in equipment tires designed to
the sidewall and under the tread. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
GM's specific tire performance
10-40 Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These
exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load
guidelines. number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
The following is an example of a
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
typical passenger vehicle
tire size. For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: or psi (pounds per square inch).
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
metric tire sizing system. The construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional
the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are
construction. automatic transmission, power
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-41
steering, power brakes, power before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See
conditioning. on page 1043. Vehicle Load Limits on
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a page 910.
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See
cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on
tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without page 910.
steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo. Intended Outboard Sidewall :
materials. DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire,
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward
steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle.
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
the rim. Department of Transportation unit for air pressure.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also vehicles.
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production. that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 910.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-42 Vehicle Care
Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb of the tire. Speed Rating: An
weight, accessory weight, alphanumeric code assigned to
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight. speed at which a tire can
some light duty trucks and
Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles. operate.
number of occupants a vehicle Traction: The friction between
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface.
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load The amount of grip provided.
Limits on page 910. manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown Tread: The portion of a tire that
Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire comes into contact with
Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 1043 and the road.
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 910. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: bars, that show across the tread
Vehicle Care 10-43
of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the Underinflated tires, or tires
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire that do not have enough air,
When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory can result in:
on page 1050. weight, occupant weight, and . Tire overloading and
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight. overheating which could
Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label lead to a blowout.
information system that provides permanently attached to a . Premature or
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle irregular wear.
tire's traction, temperature, and capacity weight and the original
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and . Poor handling.
determined by tire recommended inflation pressure. . Reduced fuel economy.
manufacturers using See Tire and Loading
government testing procedures. Information Label under Vehicle Overinflated tires, or tires that
The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 910. have too much air, can
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform result in:
Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure . Unusual wear.
page 1053. Tires need the correct amount of . Poor handling.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The air pressure to operate . Rough ride.
number of designated seating effectively.
positions multiplied by . Needless damage from
Notice: Neither tire road hazards.
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated underinflation nor
cargo load. See Vehicle Load overinflation is good. The Tire and Loading
Limits on page 910. Information label on the vehicle
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-44 Vehicle Care
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. Return the valve caps on the
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure valve stems to prevent leaks
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning and keep out dirt and moisture.
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See for at least three hours or no Tire Pressure for
Vehicle Load Limits on more than 1.6 km (1 mi). High-Speed Operation
page 910. Remove the valve cap from the
How the vehicle is loaded tire valve stem. Press the tire { WARNING
affects vehicle handling and ride gauge firmly onto the valve to
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
comfort. Never load the vehicle get a pressure measurement.
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
additional strain on tires.
designed to carry. matches the recommended Sustained high-speed driving
pressure on the Tire and causes excessive heat buildup
When to Check
Loading Information label, no and can cause sudden tire failure.
Check the tires once a month or further adjustment is necessary. You could have a crash and you
more. Do not forget the compact If the inflation pressure is low, or others could be killed. Some
spare, if the vehicle has one. add air until the recommended high-speed rated tires require
The cold compact spare tire pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure adjustment for
pressure should be at 420 kPa inflation pressure is high, press high-speed operation. When
(60 psi). See Compact Spare on the metal stem in the center speed limits and road conditions
Tire on page 1064. of the tire valve to release air. are such that a vehicle can be
Recheck the tire pressure with driven at high speeds, make sure
How to Check
the tires are rated for high-speed
Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
operation, in excellent condition,
gauge to check tire pressure. (Continued)
Proper tire inflation cannot be I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-45
like this: Maximum load the inflation pressure recommended

WARNING (Continued) 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Max. Press. vehicle placard or tire inflation
and set to the correct cold tire pressure label. (If your vehicle has
inflation pressure for the For this example, set the inflation
pressure for highspeed driving at tires of a different size than the size
vehicle load. indicated on the vehicle placard or
262 kPa (38 psi).
tire inflation pressure label, you
Vehicles with P235/55R18 size tires should determine the proper tire
Tire Pressure Monitor inflation pressure for those tires.)
require inflation pressure adjustment
when driving the vehicle at speeds System As an added safety feature, your
of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Notice: Modifications made to the vehicle has been equipped with a
Set the cold inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitor System tire pressure monitoring system
to the maximum inflation pressure (TPMS) by anyone other than an (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
shown on the tire sidewall, authorized service facility may pressure telltale when one or more
or 262 kPa (38 psi), whichever is void authorization to use the of your tires is significantly under
lower. See the example following. system. inflated.
Return the tires to the
recommended cold tire inflation The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure when high-speed driving (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as
on page 910 and Tire Pressure on levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them
page 1043. the air pressure in your vehicle's to the proper pressure. Driving on a
tires and transmit tire pressure significantly underinflated tire
Example: readings to a receiver located in the causes the tire to overheat and can
The maximum load and inflation vehicle. lead to tire failure. Underinflation
pressure is molded on the tire Each tire, including the spare (if also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sidewall, in small letters, near provided), should be checked tread life, and may affect the
the rim flange. It will read something monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and stopping
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: ability.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Please note that the TPMS is not a wheels on the vehicle that prevent
substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly.
maintenance, and it is the driver's Always check the TPMS malfunction
responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more
pressure, even if underinflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to
not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or
illumination of the TPMS low tire alternate tires and wheels allow the When a low tire pressure condition
pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Your vehicle has also been properly. the low tire pressure warning light
equipped with a TPMS malfunction See Tire Pressure Monitor on the instrument cluster. If the
indicator to indicate when the Operation on page 1046 for warning light comes on, stop as
system is not operating properly. additional information. soon as possible and inflate the
The TPMS malfunction indicator is tires to the recommended pressure
combined with the low tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitor shown on the tire loading
telltale. When the system detects a information label. See Vehicle Load
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
Operation Limits on page 910.
approximately one minute and then This vehicle may have a Tire The low tire pressure warning light
remain continuously illuminated. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). comes on at each ignition cycle until
This sequence will continue upon The TPMS is designed to warn the the tires are inflated to the correct
subsequent vehicle startups as driver when a low tire pressure inflation pressure.
long as the malfunction exists. condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel The low tire pressure warning light
When the malfunction indicator is may come on in cool weather when
assembly, excluding the spare tire
illuminated, the system may not be the vehicle is first started, and then
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
able to detect or signal low tire turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
sensors monitor the air pressure in
pressure as intended. TPMS may be an early indicator that the
the tires and transmit the tire
malfunctions may occur for a variety
pressure readings to a receiver
of reasons, including the installation
located in the vehicle.
of replacement or alternate tires or I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-47
air pressure is getting low and Always use only the

. The TPMS sensor matching
needs to be inflated to the proper GM-approved tire sealant process was not done or not
pressure. available through your dealer or completed successfully after
included in the vehicle. rotating the vehicle's tires. The
A Tire and Loading Information label malfunction light should go off
shows the size of the original TPMS Malfunction Light once the TPMS sensor matching
equipment tires and the correct process is performed
inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors successfully. See TPMS Sensor
they are cold. See Vehicle Load Matching Process later in this
Limits on page 910, for an example are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the section.
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire low tire pressure warning light . One or more TPMS sensors are
Pressure on page 1043. flashes for about one minute and missing or damaged. The
then stays on for the remainder of malfunction light should go off
The TPMS system can warn about the ignition cycle. The malfunction when the TPMS sensors are
a low tire pressure condition but it light comes on at each ignition cycle installed and the sensor
does not replace normal tire until the problem is corrected. Some matching process is performed
maintenance. See Tire Inspection of the conditions that can cause the successfully. See your dealer for
on page 1049, Tire Rotation on malfunction light to come on are: service.
page 1049 and Tires on .
page 1036. One of the road tires has been . Replacement tires or wheels do
replaced with the spare tire. The not match the original equipment
Notice: Tire sealant materials are spare tire does not have a tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
not all the same. A non-approved TPMS sensor. The malfunction other than those recommended
tire sealant could damage the light should go off after the road could prevent the TPMS from
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor tire is replaced and the sensor functioning properly. See Buying
damage caused by using an matching process is performed New Tires on page 1051.
incorrect tire sealant is not successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
covered by the vehicle warranty. Matching Process" later in this
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-48 Vehicle Care

. Operating electronic devices or There are two minutes to match the sensor identification code has
being near facilities using radio first tire/wheel position, and been matched to this tire and
wave frequencies similar to the five minutes overall to match all four wheel position.
TPMS could cause the TPMS tire/wheel positions. If it takes
sensors to malfunction. 6. Proceed to the passenger side
longer, the matching process stops front tire. The passenger side
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. front turn signal lamp comes on.
Process The TPMS matching process is: Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique 1. Set the parking brake. 7. Proceed to the passenger side
identification code. The identification 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with rear tire. The passenger side
code needs to be matched to a new the engine off. rear turn signal lamp comes on.
tire/wheel position after rotating the Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
vehicles tires or replacing one or 3. Press and hold the RKE
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
more of the TPMS sensors. Also, transmitter's Q and K buttons at tire. The driver side rear turn
the TPMS sensor matching process the same time, for about signal lamp comes on. Repeat
should be performed after replacing three seconds. The horn will the procedure in Step 5. The
a spare tire with a road tire sound twice to indicate the horn sounds two times to
containing the TPMS sensor. The receiver is ready for the sensor indicate the sensor identification
malfunction light should go off at the matching process to begin. code has been matched to the
next ignition cycle. The sensors are driver side rear tire, and the
4. Start with the driver side front
matched to the tire/wheel positions, TPMS sensor matching process
tire. The driver side turn signal
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the is no longer active.
lamp comes on.
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger 5. Place the relearn tool against 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
side rear tire, and driver side rear. the tire sidewall, near the valve 10. Set all four tires to the
See your dealer for service or to stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
purchase a relearn tool. activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire
A horn chirp confirms that the and Loading Information label.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-49
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, alignment. See When It Is Time
or other damage that cannot for New Tires on page 1050
We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of and Wheel Replacement on
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the page 1055.
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
can be seen. page 113.
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a
showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
rubber. first rotation is the most
important.
. The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged Anytime unusual wear is Use this rotation pattern when
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon rotating the tires.
fabric. as possible, check for proper tire
inflation pressure, and check for Do not include the compact
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. If the spare tire in the tire rotation.
or split. unusual wear continues after the Adjust the front and rear tires to
rotation, check the wheel the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-50 Vehicle Care
Loading Information label after

the tires have been rotated. See WARNING (Continued)
Tire Pressure on page 1043 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
and Vehicle Load Limits on an emergency, a cloth or a paper
page 910. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 1046. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion Treadwear indicators are one way to
or rust build-up. Do not get tell when it is time for new tires.
and Specifications on Treadwear indicators appear when
page 122. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
wheel nuts or bolts.
{ WARNING Inspection on page 1049 and Tire
Rotation on page 1049.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New
The rubber in tires ages over time.
parts to which it is fastened, can Tires This also applies to the spare tire,
make wheel nuts become loose
Factors such as maintenance, if the vehicle has one, even if it is
after time. The wheel could come
temperatures, driving speeds, never used. Multiple factors
off and cause an accident. When
vehicle loading, and road conditions including temperatures, loading
changing a wheel, remove any conditions, and inflation pressure
affect the wear rate of the tires.
rust or dirt from places where the maintenance affect how fast aging
(Continued) takes place. GM recommends that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: tires, including the spare if
Vehicle Care 10-51
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
four digits of the DOT Tire design, the TPC Spec number
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (0152) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 1038.
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
Vehicle Storage system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park performance may be adversely
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
substances that can deteriorate the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
rubber. Rotation on page 1049 for
vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling, information on proper tire
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire rotation. However, if it is
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring necessary to replace only one
driving. When storing a vehicle for axle set of worn tires, place the
performance. GM's TPC Spec
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: new tires on the rear axle.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Winter tires with the same speed sure they are the same size,
rating as the original equipment { WARNING load range, speed rating, and
tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes, construction (radial) as the
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause original tires.
tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire
tire's maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system
when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
{ WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitor
Tires could explode during System on page 1045.
improper service. Attempting { WARNING The Tire and Loading
to mount or dismount a tire Information label indicates the
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks on page 910.
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking,
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-53
may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
electronic systems such as antilock 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
or to some limited-production
control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
affected. and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
example: and light trucks may vary with
{ WARNING respect to these grades, they
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A safety requirements and
there may not be an acceptable additional General Motors Tire
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
tires not recommended for those standards.
wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This These Grades.
have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades Treadwear
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
See Buying New Tires on most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
page 1051 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
Modifications on page 102. (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-54 Vehicle Care
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature A, B, C
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade will not be necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. However, check the
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all alignment if there is unusual tire
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-55
road, the tires and wheels might Used Replacement Wheels

need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
Replacing a wheel with a used
Replace any wheel that is bent, one is dangerous. How it has
affect the braking and handling of
cracked, or badly rusted or been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel nuts should be replaced. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. new GM original equipment
nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel.
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing Tire Chains
Your dealer will know the kind of life, brake cooling, speedometer
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the
or odometer calibration, { WARNING
headlamp aim, bumper height,
same load-carrying capacity, vehicle ground clearance, and tire Do not use tire chains. There is
diameter, width, offset, and be or tire chain clearance to the not enough clearance. Tire chains
mounted the same way as the one it body and chassis. used on a vehicle without the
replaces. proper amount of clearance can
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel cause damage to the brakes,
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor suspension, or other vehicle
System (TPMS) sensors with new (Continued)
GM original equipment parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-56 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
parts. The area damaged by the while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
tire chains could cause loss of are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
control and a crash. on page 1036. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a
device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's what to expect and what to do:
tire size combination and road Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while
manufacturer's instructions. To creates a drag that pulls the vehicle severely underinflated or flat.
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
traction device if it contacts the steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
maintain lane position, and then possible.
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
If traction devices are used, install
road, if possible.
them on the front tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ WARNING
may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting
used in a skid. Stop pressing the under it to do maintenance or
accelerator pedal and steer to repairs is dangerous without the
straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-57
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle, it is designed only for level place to change the tire. To
changing a flat tire. If it is used for help prevent the vehicle from
anything else, you or others could moving:
be badly injured or killed if the 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
2. Put an automatic
is provided with the vehicle, only transmission in P (Park) or a
use it for changing a flat tire. 1. Wheel Block
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse). 2. Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 3. Turn off the engine and do The following information explains
and wheel damage by driving slowly not restart while the vehicle how to repair or change a tire.
to a level place, well off the road, is raised.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
4. Do not allow passengers to
Tire Changing
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 63. remain in the vehicle. Removing the Spare Tire and
5. Place wheel blocks on both Tools
{ WARNING sides of the tire at the To access the spare tire:
opposite corner of the tire
Changing a tire can be being changed. 1. Open the liftgate.
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
causing injury or death. Find a use the following example as a
(Continued) guide to assist in the placement of
the wheel blocks (1).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-58 Vehicle Care
2. Push the levers on the load floor. 4. Remove the tire protector foam. 5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt
3. Lift the load floor and hang the holding down the spare tire by
hook to the tailgate opening. turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the compact spare tire.
See Compact Spare Tire on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-59
The tools are located between the 3. Remove the straps holding the 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
compact spare tire and the liftgate. bag containing the wheel wrench all the wheel nuts. Do not
To access the tools: and extension jack handle, if the remove them yet.
vehicle has one.
Remove the wheel wrench and
extension jack handle, if the
vehicle has one, from the bag.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1056 for more
information.
1. Tool Bag 3. Position the lift head at the jack

2. Wing-bolt location nearest the flat tire.
Make sure all of the jack lift
3. Jack head is touching the jacking
1. Remove the wing-bolt (2) from flange under the body. Do not
the jack. place the jack under a body
2. Remove the jack (3) and panel. The lower body panel has
tool bag (1). an arrow to aid in locating the
jacking location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-60 Vehicle Care
4. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

{ WARNING { WARNING attach the jack handle extension
to the jack by sliding the hook
Getting under a vehicle when it is Lifting a vehicle and getting under through the end of the jack and
lifted on a jack is dangerous. it to do maintenance or repairs is insert the other end of the jack
If the vehicle slips off the jack, dangerous without the handle into the wrench.
you could be badly injured or appropriate safety equipment and
killed. Never get under a vehicle training. If a jack is provided with If you have a hex-head jack,
when it is supported only by the vehicle, it is designed only for attach the jack lift-assist tool by
placing the hex of the jack
a jack. changing a flat tire. If it is used for
lift-assist tool over the hex head
anything else, you or others could
of the jack.
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
{ WARNING is provided with the vehicle, only
Raising the vehicle with the jack use it for changing a flat tire.
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even Notice: Make sure that the jack
make the vehicle fall. To help lift head is in the correct position
avoid personal injury and vehicle or you may damage your vehicle.
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift The repairs would not be covered
head into the proper location by your warranty.
before raising the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-61
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the 9. Place the compact spare tire on
jack handle clockwise. Raise the the wheel-mounting surface.
vehicle far enough off the 10. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
ground so there is enough room Tighten each nut by hand until
for the road tire to be removed. the wheel is held against
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts. the hub.
7. Remove the flat tire.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
{ WARNING
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces Never use oil or grease on bolts
and spare wheel. or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench { WARNING could fall off, causing a crash.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can 11. Lower the vehicle by turning
make wheel nuts become loose the jack handle
after time. The wheel could come counterclockwise.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
Hex Head Jack and Wrench remove all rust or dirt.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-62 Vehicle Care
When reinstalling full plastic covers

WARNING (Continued) or center caps, tighten all the plastic
caps hand snug, then tighten with
aftermarket manufacturer when the wheel wrench an additional
using accessory locking wheel one-quarter of a turn.
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 122 for Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
original equipment wheel nut on the vehicle's compact spare.
torque specifications. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in pulsation and rotor damage. To and Tools
a crisscross sequence, as avoid expensive brake repairs,
shown. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in { WARNING
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Storing a jack, a tire, or other
{ WARNING Capacities and Specifications on equipment in the passenger
Wheel nuts that are improperly or page 122 for the wheel nut compartment of the vehicle could
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. cause injury. In a sudden stop or
the wheels to become loose or 13. Lower the jack all the way and collision, loose equipment could
come off. The wheel nuts should remove the jack from under the strike someone. Store all these in
be tightened with a torque wrench vehicle. the proper place.
to the proper torque specification 14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the
after replacing. Follow the torque wheel wrench.
specification supplied by the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-63
To store the flat or spare tire and 1. Place the wheel wrench and
tools: extension, if the vehicle has one,
into the tool bag (1) and use the
straps to secure the tool bag (1)
to the fully collapsed jack (3).
2. Install the jack (3) between the
back of the trunk and the
compact spare tire and secure
with the wing bolt (2).
3. Reverse Steps 13 under
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools to replace the floor and
Before
lock in place.
4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,
1. Tool Bag face down, on the bottom of the
spare tire compartment.
2. Wing-bolt
3. Jack
After
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-64 Vehicle Care
5. Remove the disk from the The compact spare is for temporary The spare tire is for temporary
retainer bolt. Turn the disk over use only. Replace the compact emergency use only. Replace it with
and place it back on the spare tire with a full-size tire as a regular tire as soon as possible.
retainer bolt. soon as possible. Notice: When the compact spare
Return the disk back to its is installed, do not take the
original position after removing Compact Spare Tire vehicle through an automatic car
the flat tire from the spare tire wash with guide rails. The
compartment and before storing { WARNING compact spare can get caught on
the spare tire. the rails which can damage the
Driving with more than one tire, wheel, and other parts of the
compact spare tire at a time could vehicle.
result in loss of braking and Do not use the temporary spare on
handling. This could lead to a other vehicles.
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact Do not mix the temporary spare tire
spare tire at a time. or wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
The compact spare tire was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new, Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
but it can lose air after a time. compact spare. Using them can
Check the inflation pressure damage the vehicle and the
regularly. See Vehicle Load Limits chains. Do not use tire chains on
6. Place the wheel retainer bolt on page 910 for the correct inflation the compact spare.
onto the wheel stow rod and pressure.
tighten by turning it clockwise.
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
when driving with a spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-65
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are not
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. touching each other. If they are,
page 1023. it could cause a ground
Trying to start the vehicle by
If the vehicle battery has run down, pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want. You
you may want to use another work, and it could damage the would not be able to start your
vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle. vehicle, and the bad grounding
start your vehicle. Be sure to use could damage the electrical
1. Check the other vehicle. It must systems.
the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of the
{ WARNING
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
Batteries can hurt you. They can has a 12-volt system with a involved in the jump start
be dangerous because: negative ground for jump procedure. Put the transmission
starting. If the other vehicle does in P (Park) before setting the
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a parking brake.
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged. Notice: If any accessories are left
. They contain gas that can
on or plugged in during the jump
explode or ignite.
starting procedure, they could be
. They contain enough damaged. The repairs would not
electricity to burn you. be covered by the vehicle
If you do not follow these steps warranty. Whenever possible,
turn off or unplug all accessories
exactly, some or all of these
on either vehicle when jump
things can hurt you.
starting the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-66 Vehicle Care
3. Turn off the ignition on both To uncover the remote

vehicles. Unplug unnecessary positive (+) terminal, press the
accessories plugged into the tab on the bottom of the fuse
cigarette lighter or the accessory block and lift the cover up.
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks,
helping save both batteries and
the radio.
4. Open the hood on the other
vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative ()
terminal locations on that Your vehicle is equipped with a
vehicle. remote positive (+) terminal. This
Open the hood on your vehicle is located in the engine
and find the remote positive (+) compartment on the driver side
and remote negative () jump of the vehicle, on the underhood
starting terminals. fuse block. See Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a
Compartment Overview on remote negative () terminal.
page 104 for more information This is a stud next to the engine
on location. coolant surge tank, located at
the back of the engine
compartment on the driver side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 104 for more information
on location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-67
5. Check that the jumper cables do

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas also be damaged.
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present.
clothing and tools away from any Before you connect the cables,
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
{ WARNING the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
has one. Negative () will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
Using an open flame near a part or to a remote negative ()
battery can cause battery gas to terminal if the vehicle has one.
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been { WARNING Do not connect positive (+) to
negative () or you will get a
blinded. Use a flashlight if you Fans or other moving engine short that would damage the
need more light. parts can injure you badly. Keep battery and maybe other parts.
Be sure the battery has enough your hands away from moving Do not connect the negative ()
water. You do not need to add parts once the engine is running. cable to the negative () terminal
water to the battery installed in on the dead battery because this
your new vehicle. But if a battery can cause sparks.
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-68 Vehicle Care
6. Connect the red positive (+) 9. Connect the other end of the Notice: If the jumper cables are
cable to the positive (+) terminal negative () cable away from the connected or removed in the
on the vehicle with the dead dead battery, but not near wrong order, electrical shorting
battery. Use a remote engine parts that move. The may occur and damage the
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle electrical connection is just as vehicle. The repairs would not be
has one. good there, and the chance of covered by the vehicle warranty.
7. Do not let the other end touch sparks getting back to the Always connect and remove the
metal. Connect it to the battery is much less. jumper cables in the correct
positive (+) terminal of the good 10. Now start the vehicle with the order, making sure that the
battery. Use a remote good battery and run the cables do not touch each other or
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle engine for a while. other metal.
has one. 11. Press the unlock symbol on the Jumper Cable Removal
8. Now connect the black remote keyless entry Reverse the sequence exactly when
negative () cable to the transmitter to disarm your removing the jumper cables.
negative () terminal of the good security system, if equipped.
battery. Use a remote 12. Try to start the vehicle that had
negative () terminal if the the dead battery. If it will not
vehicle has one. start after a few tries, it
Do not let the other end touch probably needs service.
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative ()
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative () terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-69
Towing To tow the vehicle behind another Here are some important things to
vehicle for recreational purposes, consider before recreational vehicle
such as behind a motor home, see towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational Vehicle Towing in this . What is the towing capacity of
Notice: Incorrectly towing a section. the towing vehicle? Be sure to
disabled vehicle may cause read the tow vehicle
damage. The damage would not Recreational Vehicle manufacturer's
be covered by the vehicle Towing recommendations.
warranty. Do not lash or hook to
the chassis components Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the distance that will be
including the front and rear towing the vehicle behind another travelled? Some vehicles have
subframes, suspension control vehicle such as behind a motor restrictions on how far and how
arms and links during towing and home. The two most common types long they can tow.
recovery of a disabled vehicle or of recreational vehicle towing are . Is the proper towing equipment
to secure the vehicle to a flatbed known as dinghy towing and dolly going to be used? See your
car carrier. Use the proper nylon towing. Dinghy towing is towing the dealer or trailering professional
strap harnesses around the tires vehicle with all four wheels on the for additional advice and
to secure the flatbed car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the equipment recommendations.
vehicle with two wheels on the
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed ground and two wheels up on a
. Is the vehicle ready to be
car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck device known as a dolly. towed? Just as preparing the
could damage the vehicle. vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
professional towing service if the towed.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-70 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing 4. Turn fog lamps and all

accessories off.
Front-wheel-drive and
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be 5. To prevent the battery from
dinghy towed from the front. These draining while the vehicle is
vehicles can also be towed by being towed, remove the 2 amp
placing them on a platform trailer PWR/MODING fuse from the
with all four wheels off of the instrument panel fuse block and
ground. For other towing options, store it in a safe location. See
see Dolly Towing following in this Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
section. page 1033.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
the vehicle should be run at the exceeded while towing the
beginning of each day and at each To tow the vehicle from the front vehicle, it could be damaged.
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. with all four wheels on the ground: Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
This will ensure proper lubrication of 1. Position the vehicle that will be while towing the vehicle.
transmission components. towed and secure it to the Notice: If the vehicle is towed
towing vehicle. without performing each of the
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ steps listed under Dinghy
ACCESSORY. Towing, the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
3. Shift the transmission to Be sure to follow all steps of the
N (Neutral). dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-71
Once the destination has been Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive To tow the vehicle from the front
reached: Vehicles) with the rear wheels on the ground,
1. Set the parking brake. do the following:
All-wheel-drive vehicles should not
2. Shift the transmission to be towed with two wheels on the 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
P (Park). ground. To properly tow these 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
vehicles, they should be placed on
3. Reinstall the 2 amp PWR/ a platform trailer with all four wheels 3. Set the parking brake.
MODING fuse to the instrument off of the ground or dinghy towed 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
panel fuse block. from the front. See Dinghy Towing straight-ahead position with a
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/ earlier in this section. clamping device designed for
OFF and remove the key from towing.
the ignition. Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) 5. Remove the key from the
Notice: Too much or too little ignition.
fluid can damage the 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
transmission. Be sure that the
transmission fluid is at the proper 7. Release the parking brake.
level before towing with all four
wheels on the ground.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
the front drive wheels on the
ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
two different tire sizes on the
front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
transmission.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-72 Vehicle Care
Towing the Vehicle From Appearance Care

the Rear
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory.
Use a de-icing agent only when
absolutely necessary, and have the
locks greased after using. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from Washing the Vehicle
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by To preserve the vehicle's finish,
the vehicle warranty. Never have wash it often and out of direct
the vehicle towed from the rear. sunlight.
Notice: Do not use
petroleum-based, acidic,
or abrasive cleaning agents as
they can damage the vehicle's
paint, metal, or plastic parts.
If damage occurs, it would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-73
Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to non-abrasive waxes and polishes
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and that are made for a basecoat/
product usage, necessary safety repaired. Foreign materials such as clearcoat paint finish on the
precautions, and appropriate calcium chloride and other salts, ice vehicle.
disposal of any vehicle care melting agents, road oil and tar, tree To keep the paint finish looking new,
product. sap, bird droppings, chemicals from keep the vehicle garaged or
Notice: Avoid using industrial chimneys, etc., can covered whenever possible.
high-pressure washes closer than damage the vehicle's finish if they
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the remain on painted surfaces. Wash Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
vehicle. Use of power washers the vehicle as soon as possible. Parts
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) If necessary, use non-abrasive Regularly clean bright metal parts
can result in damage or removal cleaners that are marked safe for with water or chrome polish on
of paint and decals. painted surfaces to remove foreign chrome or stainless steel trim,
matter. if necessary.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild For aluminum, never use auto or
cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove chrome polish, steam, or caustic
are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See soap to clean. A coating of wax,
they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning rubbed to a high polish, is
products. recommended for all bright metal
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to parts.
avoid surface scratches and water uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
spotting. Lenses and Emblems
as damage can occur.
Finish Care Notice: Machine compounding or Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
Application of aftermarket clearcoat aggressive polishing on a soft cloth, and a car washing soap
sealant/wax materials is not basecoat/clearcoat paint finish to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
recommended. If painted surfaces may damage it. Use only
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-74 Vehicle Care
emblems. Follow instructions under rubber material on painted surfaces driving on roads that have been
"Washing the Vehicle" in this can be removed by rubbing with a sprayed with magnesium,
section. clean cloth. See Recommended calcium, or sodium chloride.
Fluids and Lubricants on These chlorides are used on
Windshield and Wiper Blades page 1112. roads for conditions such as ice
Clean the outside of the windshield and dust. Always wash the
with glass cleaner.
Tires chrome with soap and water after
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to exposure.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with clean the tires. Notice: To avoid surface damage,
windshield washer fluid or a mild Notice: Using petroleum-based do not use strong soaps,
detergent. Wash the windshield tire dressing products on the chemicals, abrasive polishes,
thoroughly when cleaning the vehicle may damage the paint cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and finish and/or tires. When applying that contain acid on aluminum or
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome-plated wheels. Use only
treatments may cause wiper any overspray from all painted approved cleaners. Also, never
streaking. surfaces on the vehicle. drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
Replace the wiper blades if they are Wheels and Trim Aluminum automatic car wash that uses
worn or damaged. Damage can be or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning
caused by extreme dusty
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild brushes. Damage could occur
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
soap and water to clean the wheels. and the repairs would not be
snow, and ice.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean covered by the vehicle warranty.
Weatherstrips water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and
Apply silicone grease on A wax may then be applied. Chassis Components
weatherstrips to make them last Notice: Chrome wheels and other
longer, seal better, and not stick or Visually inspect the front and rear
chrome trim may be damaged if
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips suspension and steering system for
the vehicle is not washed after
once a year. Black marks from I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
Vehicle Care 10-75
signs of wear. Inspect the power Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular
steering for proper hook-up, binding, dark spots etched into the paint
If the vehicle is damaged and
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually surface.
requires sheet metal repair or
check constant velocity joints,
replacement, make sure the body
rubber boots, and axle seals for
repair shop applies anti-corrosion Interior Care
leaks.
material to parts repaired or To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
Body Component Lubrication replaced to restore corrosion regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
protection. Immediately remove any soils. Note
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
Original manufacturer replacement that newspapers or dark garments
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
parts will provide the corrosion that can transfer color to home
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying protection while maintaining the furnishings can also permanently
silicone grease on weatherstrips vehicle warranty. transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
with a clean cloth will make them
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Quickly repair minor chips and dust from knobs and crevices on the
scratches with touch-up materials instrument cluster. Using a mild
Underbody Maintenance available from your dealer to avoid soap solution, immediately remove
Use plain water to flush dirt and corrosion. Larger areas of finish hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
debris from the vehicle's underbody. damage can be corrected in your repellent from all interior surfaces or
Your dealer or an underbody car dealer's body and paint shop. permanent damage may result.
washing system can do this. If not Your dealer may have products for
removed, rust and corrosion can
Chemical Paint Spotting
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
develop. Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the
and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. Apply all
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-76 Vehicle Care
on any switches or controls.

. Do not use laundry detergents or Notice: To prevent scratching,
Cleaners should be removed dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on
quickly. Never allow cleaners to degreasers. For liquid cleaners, automotive glass. Abrasive
remain on the surface being use approximately 20 drops per cleaners or aggressive cleaning
cleaned for extended periods 3.78 L (1 gal) of water. may damage the rear window
of time. A concentrated soap solution will defogger.
leave a residue that creates
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not Notice: Cleaning the windshield
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong with water during the first three to
interior. Before using cleaners, read or caustic soap. six months of ownership will
and adhere to all safety instructions reduce tendency to fog.
on the label. While cleaning the
. Do not heavily saturate the
interior, maintain adequate upholstery when cleaning. Speaker Covers
ventilation by opening the doors and . Do not use solvents or cleaners Vacuum around a speaker cover
windows. containing solvents. gently, so that the speaker will not
To prevent damage, do not clean be damaged. Clean spots with just
Interior Glass water and mild soap.
the interior using the following
cleaners or techniques: To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Coated Moldings
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth. Coated moldings should be cleaned.
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface.
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
used, if necessary, after cleaning sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a brush with stiff the interior glass with plain water. dampened with water.
bristles.
. When heavily soiled, use warm
. Never rub any surface soapy water.
aggressively or with excessive
pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-77
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display.
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-78 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Leather, Do not use cleaners that increase Care of Safety Belts
Vinyl, and Other Plastic gloss, especially on the instrument
Keep belts clean and dry.
Surfaces panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
Use a soft microfiber cloth under certain conditions. { WARNING
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more Notice: Use of air fresheners may Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
thorough cleaning, use a soft cause permanent damage to It may severely weaken them. In
microfiber cloth dampened with a plastics and painted surfaces. a crash, they might not be able to
mild soap solution. If an air freshener comes in provide adequate protection.
contact with any plastic or Clean safety belts only with mild
Notice: Soaking or saturating painted surface in the vehicle,
leather, especially perforated soap and lukewarm water.
blot immediately and clean with a
leather, as well as other interior soft cloth dampened with a mild
surfaces, may cause permanent
damage. Wipe excess moisture
soap solution. Damage caused by Floor Mats
air fresheners would not be
from these surfaces after covered by the vehicle warranty.
cleaning and allow them to dry { WARNING
naturally. Never use heat, steam, Cargo Cover and
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do Convenience Net If a floor mat is the wrong size or
not use cleaners that contain is not properly installed, it can
Wash with warm water and mild interfere with the pedals.
silicone or wax-based products.
detergent. Do not use chlorine Interference with the pedals can
Cleaners containing these
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and cause unintended acceleration
solvents can permanently change
then dry completely. and/or increased stopping
the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not distance which can cause a crash
recommended. and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care 10-79
Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals. Removing and Replacing the
. Use the floor mat with the Floor Mats
correct side up. Do not turn 1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
it over. remove it from the hooks.
. Do not place anything on top of 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
the driver side floor mat. mat retainer openings over the
. Use only a single floor mat on carpet retainers and hook into
the driver side. position.
. Do not place one floor mat on 3. Make sure the floor mat is
top of another. properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
The driver side floor mat is held in pedals.
place by two hook-type retainers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-80 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have upto and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 date tools and equipment for fast keep the vehicle in good working
and accurate diagnostics. Many condition.
Recommended Fluids dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and The Tire Rotation and Required
Saturday hours, courtesy
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Services are the responsibility of the
transportation, and online
Maintenance Replacement vehicle owner. It is recommended to
scheduling to assist with service
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 have your dealer perform these
needs.
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Maintenance Records Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required Services

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Severe are for vehicles that are: { WARNING
There may need to be more . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
frequent checks and services. The Performing maintenance work can
in hot weather. be dangerous and can cause
Additional Required Services
Normal are for vehicles that: . Mainly driven in hilly or serious injury. Perform
mountainous terrain. maintenance work only if the
. Carry passengers and cargo required information, proper tools,
within recommended limits on . Frequently towing a trailer.
and equipment are available.
the Tire and Loading Information . Used for high speed or If they are not, see your dealer to
label. See Vehicle Load Limits competitive driving. have a trained technician do the
on page 910.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery work. See Doing Your Own
. Are driven on reasonable road service. Service Work on page 103.
surfaces within legal driving
limits. Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Use the recommended fuel. See Required Services Severe chart.
Recommended Fuel on
page 935.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services Normal chart.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every 12 000 km/
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. When the the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See message displays, have the engine Rotation on page 1049.
Engine Oil on page 108. oil and filter changed as soon as
possible. If driven under the best
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month conditions, the engine oil life system life percentage. If needed,
might not indicate the need for change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
vehicle service for more than a year. reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
The engine oil and filter must be Oil on page 108 and Engine Oil
page 1043.
changed at least once a year and Life System on page 1010.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See the oil life system must be reset. . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 1049. Your trained dealer technician can Engine Coolant on page 1014.
. Check the windshield washer perform this work. If the engine oil . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on life system is reset accidentally,
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 1020. service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
page 1020.
3,000 mi since the last service.
Reset the oil life system when the . Visually inspect windshield wiper
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life blades for wear, cracking,
System on page 1010. or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 1072. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 1025.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Check tire inflation pressures. . Visually inspect fuel system for . Check parking brake and
See Tire Pressure on damage or leaks. automatic transmission park
page 1043. . Visually inspect exhaust system mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire and nearby heat shields for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Inspection on page 1049. loose or damaged parts. page 1024.
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Lubricate body components. See
. Check accelerator pedal for
Exterior Care on page 1072. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace if needed.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Check starter switch. See Starter
page 1011. Switch Check on page 1023.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Inspect brake system. . Check automatic transmission damage. Check the hold open
. Visually inspect steering, shift lock control function. See ability of the strut. See your
suspension, and chassis Automatic Transmission Shift dealer if service is required.
components for damaged, loose, Lock Control Function Check on .
page 1024. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
or missing parts or signs of if equipped. See Sunroof on
wear. See Exterior Care on . Check ignition transmission lock. page 215.
page 1072. See Ignition Transmission Lock
. Check restraint system Check on page 1024.
components. See Safety System
Check on page 316.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Footnotes Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services Normal (4) Do not directly power wash the
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 1013.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first.
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has (7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
one, works properly. Replace as cracking, or damage; replace,
needed. if needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Footnotes Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services Severe (4) Do not directly power wash the
Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 1013.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first.
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has (7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
one, works properly. Replace as cracking, or damage; replace,
needed. if needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicles systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 1112 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Hoses Shocks and Struts Tires

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure.
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more
Lamps tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord
. As part of the multi-point or fabric showing through the
Properly working headlamps, rubber; cracks or cuts in the
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
important to see and be seen on split in the tire.
the road. the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
attention include dimming, failure when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
to light, cracking, or damage. provide tire/wheel balancing
The brake lamps need to be services to ensure smooth
checked periodically to ensure vehicle operation at all speeds.
that they light when braking. Your dealer sells and services
. With a multi-point inspection, name brand tires.
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Care Windshield

To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the
new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield
available from your dealer. For clean and clear.
information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include
protect the vehicles interior and scratches, cracks, and chips.
exterior, see Interior Care on
. Trained dealer technicians can
page 1075 and Exterior Care on
page 1072. inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
Wheel Alignment if needed.
Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper Blades
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
. Signs that the alignment may provide a clear view.
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle . Signs of wear include streaking,
handling, or unusual tire wear. skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper . Trained dealer technicians can
wheel alignment. check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 108.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 1014.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Liftgate Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Sunroof Track Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 25925618
Passenger Side 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 25925620
Rear 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 63.1 L 16.6 gal
Transmission Fluid*
Six-Speed Automatic (MH7) Two-Wheel Drive 5.0 L 5.3 qt
Six-Speed Automatic (MHJ) AWD 5.0 L 5.3 qt
Six-Speed Automatic (MHK) Two-Wheel Drive 7.8 L 8.2 qt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 1011 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 (LEA) K Automatic 0.90 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6 (LFW) 5 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Customer Information 13-1
Customer GM Mobility Reimbursement Reporting Safety Defects

Program (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects to
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 the United States
Roadside Assistance Program Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information Roadside Assistance the Canadian
Customer Satisfaction Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Scheduling Service General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Customer Satisfaction Appointments (U.S. and
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Courtesy Transportation Privacy
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Program (U.S. and Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Collision Damage Repair Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance for Text (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Service Publications Radio Frequency
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge or write to:
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business General Motors of Canada Limited
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Bureaus, Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Customer Satisfaction However, we recognize that despite STEP THREE

the good intentions of all parties
Procedure (Mexico) involved, sometimes a
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the
the normal means, we suggest the following information:
following steps: . Name
STEP ONE . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension Explain your case to your dealer . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by service agent, service manager,
General Motors to supplement the dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year
warranty included with the new manager, depending on your case. . Brand
vehicle purchase.
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. necessary information. They are Number (VIN)
interested in your continual
Customer Assistance . Mileage
satisfaction.
Procedure . Delivery date
STEP TWO
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and If you are not satisfied, please
. Dealership name
General Motors. contact the general manager or your
dealership owner to ask for their . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
help. If they are not able to resolve
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
your case, ask them to contact the
vehicle must be handled by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 135 or
right people at General Motors for
dealer sales or service departments. Customer Assistance Offices
support, if needed.
(Mexico) on page 135.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Customer Assistance Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Chevrolet encourages customers to
CA1-163-005 Mexico
call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
assistance. However, if a customer 01-800-466-0811
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca United States and Canada
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-866-466-8190
United States and Puerto Rico 1-800-263-7854 (French)
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Costa Rica
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) 00-800-052-1005
Center Roadside Assistance:
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800 Guatemala
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas 1-800-999-5252
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General Panama
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. 00-800-052-0001
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: Customer Assistance Dominican Republic
1-800-243-8872 Offices (Mexico) 1-888-751-5301
From U.S. Virgin Islands: To contact the Customer Assistance El Salvador
1-800-496-9994 Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section. 800-6273
Customer assistance is available Honduras
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 800-0122-6101
09:00 to 15:00
I
nfor
mat
ihours.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Customer Assistance for Membership Benefits H (Other Account Information):

Text Telephone (TTY) E (Vehicle Information): View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view radio, and OnStar account
Users (U.S. and Canada) vehicle-specific how-to videos. information.
To assist customers who are deaf, F (Live Chat Support):
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
G (Maintenance Information): Chat live
View maintenance schedules, with online help representatives.
and who use Text Telephones
required alerts, OnStar onboard Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
vehicle diagnostic information, and your vehicle.
equipment available at its Customer
schedule service appointments.
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in Chevrolet Owner Centre
the U.S. can communicate with I (Service History): View
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca
Chevrolet by dialing: printable dealer-recorded service
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records and self-recorded service Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. records. Centre:
D (Preferred Dealer . Chat live with online help
Online Owner Center Information): Select a preferred representatives.
dealer and view dealer location, . Use the Vehicle Tools section.
Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com . Access third party enthusiast
J (Warranty Tracking sites and social media networks.
The Chevrolet online owner Information): Track the vehicles
experience is a one-stop resource warranty information. . Locate owner resources such as
that allows interaction with lease-end, financing, and
Chevrolet and keeps important J (Recall Information): View warranty information.
vehicle-specific information in one active recalls or search by Vehicle
place. Identification Number (VIN). See
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
on page 121.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Retrieve your favorite articles, required for the vehicle, such as Roadside Assistance provides
quizzes, tips, and multimedia hand controls or a wheelchair/ assistance to the driver and
galleries organized into the scooter lift for the vehicle. passengers while driving the vehicle
Features and Auto Care within your city of residence or on
Sections. For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or any passable road in Mexico, the
. Download the owner manual for call the GM Mobility Assistance United States, and Canada.
your vehicle, quickly and easily. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Services are subject to the
Telephone (TTY) users, call limitations described in the following
. Find the pages. Program coverage varies by
Chevrolet-recommended 1-800-833-9935.
country.
maintenance services for your General Motors of Canada also has
vehicle. a Mobility Program. Call Roadside Assistance is available
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for 24 hours a day, 365 days of
GM Mobility details. TTY users call the year.
Reimbursement Program 1-800-263-3830. This program expires two years
from the date of the invoice for the
(U.S. and Canada) Roadside Assistance vehicle, regardless of vehicle
mileage and changes in vehicle
Program (Mexico) ownership.
As a new owner, your vehicle is
For more information about the
automatically enrolled in the
renewal of this program at the end
Roadside Assistance program. The
of its term, contact the Chevrolet
services are available at no cost
Customer Assistance Center at
under the terms and conditions of
01-800-466-0800.
This program is available to the program. The Roadside
qualified applicants for cost Assistance program is not part of,
reimbursement of eligible or included, in the coverage
aftermarket adaptive equipment provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. InformationProvidedby:
Services Provided
. *Emergency Calls: Call for If the vehicle is in another city
emergency services. outside of your residence,
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to
change a flat tire, Roadside
. *Dealership Location Roadside Assistance is limited
Assistance will provide towing Assistance: Information to moving the vehicle to the
service to the nearest authorized regarding addresses and nearest dealer. If you would like
Chevrolet dealership. It is the telephone numbers for Chevrolet the vehicle moved to a different
owner's responsibility for the dealers. dealer, you will be asked to
repair or replacement of the tire. cover the difference in cost at
. Emergency Towing: Tow to the the time of the move.
This service is limited to the nearest dealer for warranty
transfer of the vehicle to the service if the vehicle cannot be If the vehicle cannot be received
repair facility. driven. by the nearest Chevrolet dealer
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: due to scheduling conflicts, the
If the vehicle is involved in an vehicle will be taken to a safe
Delivery of enough fuel for the accident during the commission
vehicle to get to the nearest place where it will remain for up
of a crime, administrative to 48 hours until it can be taken
service station. violation, or breach of traffic to the dealer. If the storage costs
. Lock-Out Service: Service to regulations, Roadside exceed the amount authorized,
unlock the vehicle if you are Assistance will not provide the owner is responsible to pay
locked out. service. When the vehicle is not the difference at the time of
accessible to be towed, all service. Contact Roadside
. Battery Jump Start: Service to maneuvers required to access it
jump start a dead battery. Assistance for more information
will be at the owner's expense. on authorized amounts.
. *Emergency Messages:
Transmission of urgent phone
messages.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. *Trip Interruption: This service A rental car will be provided for
. *Complimentary
is provided if you are prevented up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle Pick
from further usage of your must be returned to its original Up: Transportation to pick up
vehicle while traveling and it is destination, excluding vehicles your vehicle after repairs are
not possible for the nearest with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
Chevrolet dealership to repair than 3.5 tons. reported that the vehicle has
the vehicle the same day, been repaired, Roadside
requiring the vehicle to stay at Complimentary Transportation: If Assistance will provide bus or
the dealership for a night or you prefer to continue your trip commercial airline one-way
more. If this happens, in addition to the intended destination or service (subject to availability)
to the previously listed services return to your place of for the person designated by you
and prior to confirmation by the residence, and the trip requires to collect your vehicle at the
dealership, you are entitled to more than eight hours driving on dealership's location if you or the
choose one of the following the road, transportation for the designated person are not in the
alternatives, within the limits of driver and passengers by first same town or city as the
existing Roadside Assistance class bus or coach commercial dealership.
program guidelines. If the costs airline will be provided to a
location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided for
exceed the amount authorized U.S. or Canada residents. All
for these services, you must pay Assistance, depending on
availability at the chosen services provided in the U.S. and
the difference at the time of Canada are at the owner's expense
service. destination. Restrictions apply
based on vehicle specifications. and will be reimbursed by Roadside
Roadside Assistance will Assistance.
coordinate hotel If you are on the road, taxi
accommodations for all vehicle service to the nearest bus
travelers for up to two nights. station or airport will be
provided.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Services Not Included in Roadside

. Food service, beverages, Contacting Roadside Assistance
Assistance telephone calls, or other extra
costs. Accommodation costs Roadside Assistance services are of
Roadside Assistance does not apply only to Mexico per the no cost to you and available
cover or reimburse services for the terms and conditions of the 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
following: Roadside Assistance program. Costs are only incurred in situations
. Events caused by fraud or bad that exceed the limits of the
. Any damage to the vehicle program, some of which are listed
faith by the driver. without intent, derived from the previously in this section.
. Vehicle immobilization situations services provided.
due to a major force or To contact Roadside Assistance by
. Cost of towing a trailer when phone, use the following numbers:
unforeseen circumstances, such choosing a Chevrolet dealer that
as natural phenomena of an is nearest to the temporary Mexico
extraordinary nature, storage facility for the disabled
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, 01-800-466-0800
vehicle.
and other cyclonic storms. United States
. Cost of all maneuvers required
. Vehicle immobilization situations to access the vehicle when it is 1-866-466-8901
arising from car accidents not available to be towed.
caused by the driver of the Canada
. Cost of fuel provided.
vehicle or third parties. This 1-800-268-6800
means any occurrence that Routine vehicle repair costs are not
causes physical injury to the E-mail
covered by the Roadside
occupants and/or the vehicle Assistance program. For more asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
caused by external forces. information, see your new vehicle Chevrolet reserves the right to make
. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, warranty. any changes or discontinue the
armed forces or police actions Roadside Assistance program at
which prevent timely delivery of any time without notification.
assistance services.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
Program (U.S. and delivery date of the vehicle. times.
Canada) . Description of the problem.
Services Provided
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438). Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever vehicle to get to the nearest
For Canadian-purchased vehicles, service station.
comes first.
call 1-800-268-6800.
In the U.S., anyone driving the . Lock-Out Service: Service to
Service is available 24 hours a day, unlock the vehicle if you are
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
365 days a year. locked out. A remote unlock may
person driving the vehicle without
Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar.
covered. For security reasons, the driver
When calling Roadside Assistance, must present identification
have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of before this service is given.
ready: the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of . Emergency Tow from a Public
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the
home telephone number. make any changes or discontinue nearest Chevrolet dealer for
. Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at warranty service, or if the vehicle
location. any time without notification. was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of when the vehicle is stuck in the
Canada Limited reserve the right to sand, mud, or snow.
. Model, year, color, and license
limit services or payment to an
plate number of the vehicle. . Flat Tire Change: Service to
owner or driver if they decide the
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
must be in good condition and restricted. Propane and other to Roadside Assistance.
properly inflated. It is the owner's fuels are not provided through Mechanical failures may be
responsibility for the repair or this service. covered, however any cost for
replacement of the tire if it is not . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty. registration is required. covered by the warranty are the
. Battery Jump Start: Service to owner responsibility.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
jump start a dead battery. Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
Services Not Included in 250 kilometers from where your
trip was started to qualify. Appointments (U.S. and
Roadside Assistance
General Motors of Canada Canada)
. Impound towing caused by Limited requires
violation of any laws. When the vehicle requires warranty
pre-authorization, original service, contact your dealer and
. Legal fines. detailed receipts, and a copy of request an appointment. By
.
the repair orders. Once scheduling a service appointment
Mounting, dismounting, authorization has been received,
or changing of snow tires, and advising the service consultant
the Roadside Assistance advisor of your transportation needs, your
chains, or other traction devices. will help to make arrangements dealer can help minimize your
. Towing or services for vehicles and explain how to receive inconvenience.
driven on a non-public road or payment.
highway. If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
. Alternative Service: If into the service department
Services Specific to assistance cannot be provided immediately, keep driving it until it
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles right away, the Roadside can be scheduled for service,
Assistance advisor may give unless, of course, the problem is
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement permission to get local
is approximately $5 Canadian. safety related. If it is, please call
emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
Diesel fuel delivery may be receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
after sending the original receipt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If your dealer requests you to bring entitled Limited Warranty and Public Transportation or Fuel
the vehicle for service, you are Owner Assistance Information Reimbursement
urged to do so as early in the work furnished with each new vehicle If the vehicle requires overnight
day as possible to allow for provides detailed warranty coverage warranty repairs, and public
same-day repair. information. transportation is used instead of
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the
Courtesy Transportation expense must be supported by
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be original receipts and can only be up
completed while you wait. However, to the maximum amount allowed by
Canada) if you are unable to wait, GM helps GM for shuttle service. In addition,
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by for U.S. customers, should you
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation arrange transportation through a
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the friend or relative, limited
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can offer reimbursement for reasonable fuel
program for vehicles with the one of the following: expenses may be available. Claim
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs
Coverage period in Canada), and be supported by original
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred receipts. See your dealer for
hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy information regarding the allowance
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide amounts for reimbursement of fuel
shuttle service to get you to your or other transportation costs.
Several Courtesy Transportation destination with minimal interruption
options are available to assist in of your daily schedule. This includes Courtesy Rental Vehicle
reducing inconvenience when one-way or round-trip shuttle service
warranty repairs are required. Your dealer may arrange to provide
within reasonable time and distance you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area. reimburse you for a rental vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
Warranty. A separate booklet for an overnight warranty repair.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to Collision parts are the best choice to
and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change, ensure that the vehicle's designed
receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy appearance, durability, and safety
and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to are preserved. The use of Genuine
and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim GM parts can help maintain the GM
rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its Recycled original equipment parts
minimum age requirements, sole discretion. may also be used for repair. These
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. parts are typically removed from
You are responsible for fuel usage Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
(U.S. and Canada) prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
fees, excessive mileage, or rental If the vehicle is involved in a
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
usage beyond the completion of the collision and it is damaged, have the
A recycled original equipment GM
repair. damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to
technician using the proper
It may not be possible to provide a maintain the vehicle's originally
equipment and quality replacement
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. designed appearance and safety
parts. Poorly performed collision
performance; however, the history of
Additional Program repairs diminish the vehicle resale
these parts is not known. Such parts
Information value, and safety performance can
are not covered by the GM New
be compromised in subsequent
All program options, such as shuttle Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
collisions.
service, may not be available at related failures are not covered by
every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts that warranty.
dealer for specific information about Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also
availability. All Courtesy parts made with the same materials available. These are made by
Transportation arrangements will be and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may
administered by appropriate dealer parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle.
personnel. originally built.InfoGenuine
r
mat
ionPr dedGM
ovi by: As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms. If a Crash Occurs
corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
If there has been an injury, call
perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
emergency services for help. Do not
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
leave the scene of a crash until all
covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
matters have been taken care of.
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Move the vehicle only if its position
failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
puts you in danger, or you are
covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
instructed to move it by a police
When purchasing insurance, we
Repair Facility officer.
recommend that you ensure that the
GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM Give only the necessary information
choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts. to police and other parties involved
meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not in the crash.
need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current For emergency towing see
may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching Roadside Assistance Program
with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier. (Mexico) on page 137 or Roadside
stateoftheart equipment, or be If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Assistance Program (U.S. and
able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have Canada) on page 1311.
center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with
technicians and comparable Gather the following information:
Genuine GM Original Equipment
equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver name, address, and
Genuine Manufacturer replacement telephone number.
Insuring the Vehicle
parts. Read the lease carefully, as . Driver license number.
Protect your investment in the GM you may be charged at the end of . Owner name, address, and
vehicle with comprehensive and the lease for poor quality repairs.
collision insurance coverage. There telephone number.
are significant differences in the . Vehicle license plate number.
quality of coverage afforded by
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

. Vehicle make, model, and Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
model year. required replacement collision parts of the repair and parts choices as
. Vehicle Identification be original equipment parts, either long as the cost stays within
Number (VIN). new Genuine GM parts or recycled reasonable limits.
original GM parts. Remember,
. Insurance company and policy
number.
recycled parts will not be covered by Service Publications
the GM vehicle warranty.
. General description of the
Ordering Information
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals
Choose a reputable repair facility Depending on your policy limits, Service Manuals have the diagnosis
that uses quality replacement parts. your insurance company may and repair information on the
See Collision Parts earlier in this initially value the repair using engines, transmission, axle,
section. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with suspension, brakes, electrical,
the repair professional, and insist on steering, body, etc.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Will You See after an Airbag Service Bulletins
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
Inflates? on page 323.
obligated to have the vehicle Service Bulletins give additional
Managing the Vehicle Damage repaired with Genuine GM parts, technical service information
Repair Process even if your insurance coverage needed to knowledgeably service
does not pay the full cost. General Motors cars and trucks.
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions
that you take an active role in its company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
repair. If you have a pre-determined you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
repair facility of choice, take the repair valuation based on that
vehicle there, or have it towed there. insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Owner Information Current and Past Models Reporting Safety

Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and Defects
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
information about the vehicle. The Reporting Safety Defects
ORDER TOLL FREE:
Owner Manual includes the 1-800-551-4123 Monday Friday to the United States
Maintenance Schedule for all 8:00 AM 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government
models.
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
Owner Manual, and Warranty has a defect which could cause
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or
Manual.
Or write to: death, you should immediately
RETAIL SELL PRICE: inform the National Highway
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
shipping fees. Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Without Portfolio: Owner Plymouth, MI 48170 General Motors.
Manual only.
Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar
RETAIL SELL PRICE: notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and obligation. Allow ample time for
shipping fees. investigation, and if it finds that
delivery. a safety defect exists in a group
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. and remedy campaign.
funds. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Transport Canada at
Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicles performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicles age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
GM will not access this data or and, in certain situations, the Radio Frequency
share it with others except: with the location and approximate GPS
consent of the vehicle owner or, speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
Statement
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar Terms and Conditions and This vehicle has systems that
consent of the lessee; in response Privacy Statement on the OnStar operate on a radio frequency that
to an official request by police or website. comply with Part 15 of the Federal
similar government office; as part of Communications Commission (FCC)
GM's defense of litigation through Radio Frequency rules and with Industry Canada
the discovery process; or, as Standards RSSGEN/210/220/310.
required by law. Data that GM
Identification (RFID)
Operation is subject to the following
collects or receives may also be RFID technology is used in some
two conditions:
used for GM research needs or may vehicles for functions such as tire
be made available to others for pressure monitoring and ignition 1. The device may not cause
research purposes, where a need is system security, as well as in harmful interference.
shown and the data is not tied to a connection with conveniences such 2. The device must accept any
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) interference received, including
transmitters for remote door locking/ interference that may cause
OnStar unlocking and starting, and undesired operation of the
in-vehicle transmitters for garage device.
If the vehicle is equipped with door openers. RFID technology in
OnStar and has an active GM vehicles does not use or record Changes or modifications to any of
subscription, additional data may be personal information or link with any these systems by other than an
collected through the OnStar other GM system containing authorized service facility could void
system. This includes information personal information. authorization to use this equipment.
about the vehicles operation; about
collisions involving the vehicle; the
use of the vehicle and its features;
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press X to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicles key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency OnStar Services automatic door locks, and can help
button ] to get a priority police locate the vehicle if it is
connection to an Emergency stolen.
Emergency
Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
OnStar navigation requires the
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
Directions and Connections
respond to an AMBER Alert. even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and Press ] to connect to an
evacuation routes. Press Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. See
emergency situations before first
www.onstar.com (U.S.),
responders arrive.
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Security Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar provides services like Stolen 1. Press Q to connect to a live
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Advisor.
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped. OnStar 2. Request directions.
can unlock the vehicle doors 3. Directions are downloaded to the
remotely, if it is equipped with vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say Repeat. System responds Destination Download: Press Q,
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
responds with OnStar ready, download directions to the
Cancel Route then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
1. Press X. System responds: 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice After the call ends, press the Go
OnStar ready, then a tone. Say commands. button on the navigation screen to
Cancel route. System begin driving directions.
Get My Destination
responds: Do you want to Destinations can also be
cancel directions? 1. Press X. System responds: downloaded on the go. For
2. Say Yes. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. information about eNav, Destination
OK, request completed, thank 2. Say Get my destination. Download, and coverage maps, see
you, goodbye. System responds with address www.onstar.com (U.S.),
and the distance to the www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
destination, then responds with
1. Press X. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. Connections
OnStar ready, then a tone. 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
2. Say Route preview. System commands. calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Other Navigation Services controlled from a cell phone through
Available from OnStar the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice For coverage maps, see
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from www.onstar.com (U.S.),
Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Navigation or screen-based
1. Press X. System responds:
navigation system. When ready, the
OnStar ready, then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle. InformationProvidedby:
14-4 OnStar
Hands-Free Calling Retrieve My Number 4. Pick a name tag. System

responds: About to store <name
1. Press X. System responds: 1. PressX. System responds: tag>. Does that sound OK?
OnStar ready. OnStar ready.
5. Say Yes or No to try again.
2. Say Call. System responds: 2. Say My number. System System responds: OK, storing
Please say the name or number responds: Your OnStar <name tag>.
to call. Hands-Free Calling number is.
Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without End a Call Number
pausing, including a 1 and the
area code. System responds: Press X. System responds: Call 1. Press X. System responds:
OK calling. ended. OnStar ready.
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed 2. Say Call <name tag>. System
Dialing responds: OK, calling
1. Press X. The system responds <name tag>.
OnStar Ready, followed by 1. Press X. System responds:
a tone. OnStar ready. Verify Minutes and Expiration
2. Say Call. The system responds 2. Say Store. System responds: Press X and say Minutes then
Please say the name or number Please say the number you Verify to check how many minutes
to call. would like to store. remain and their expiration date.
3. Say 911 without pausing. The 3. Say the entire number without
system responds 911. pausing. System responds:
4. Say Call. The system responds Please say the name tag.
OK, dialing 911.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Mobile App OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

Download the OnStar RemoteLink Information Automatic Crash Response,
mobile app to select iPhone, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Android and Blackberry devices to Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
check vehicle fuel level, oil life, Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
OnStar RemoteLink information and account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
compatibility, see www.onstar.com receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada). ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
Diagnostics vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
information. conditions:
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every Reactivation for Subsequent . In the U.S. see www.onstar.com
month. It will check the engine, Owners (U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
transmission, antilock brakes, and (1-888-466-7827).
major vehicle systems. It also Press Q and follow the prompts to . In Canada see www.onstar.ca
checks the tire pressures, if the speak to an Advisor as soon as (Canada) or call
vehicle is equipped with the Tire possible after acquiring the vehicle. 1-888-4.ONSTAR.
Pressure Monitoring System. If a The Advisor will update vehicle (1-888-466-7827).
diagnostics check is needed records and will explain the OnStar
. TTY 1-877-248-2080
service offers and options available.
between e-mails, press Q, and an
Advisor can run a check. . Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-6 OnStar
OnStar services require a vehicle service such as hills, tall buildings, TTY Users
electrical system, wireless service, tunnels, weather, electrical system
OnStar has the ability to
and GPS satellite technologies to be design and architecture of the
communicate to the deaf,
available and operating for features vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
to function properly. These systems crash, or wireless phone network
customers while in the vehicle. The
may not operate if the battery is congestion or jamming.
available dealer-installed TTY
discharged or disconnected. See Radio Frequency Statement on system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar service cannot work unless page 1320 for information access to all of the OnStar services,
your vehicle is in a place where regarding Part 15 of the Federal except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar has an agreement with a Communications Commission (FCC) Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
wireless service provider for service rules and Industry Canada
in that area, and the wireless Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
service provider has coverage, (Canada)
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with
Disabilities The website provides access to
technology compatible with OnStar account information, allows
service. Service involving location Advisors provide services to help management of the OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot subscribers with physical disabilities subscription, and viewing of videos
work unless GPS signals are and medical conditions. of each service. Get subscription
available, unobstructed, and plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
compatible with the OnStar Press Q for help with: Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
hardware. OnStar service may not . Locating a gas station with an My Account tab on the home
work if the OnStar equipment is not attendant to pump gas. page. The website navigation and
properly installed or it has not been services provided may vary by
properly maintained. If equipment or
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
country.
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs.
or modified, OnStar service may not . Providing directions to the
work. Other problems beyond the closest hospital or pharmacy in
control of OnStar may prevent urgent situations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle. after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. open area.
Global Positioning
Warranty System (GPS) Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New occur in a large city with tall antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The buildings; in parking garages; and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle around airports; in tunnels, reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty underpasses, or parking send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. garages; or in an area with very Unable to Connect to OnStar
dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
Languages not available, the OnStar system
The vehicle can be programmed to should still operate to call If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in French or Spanish. OnStar. However, OnStar could or the cellular network has reached
have difficulty identifying the maximum capacity, this message
Press Q and ask an Advisor.
Advisors can speak French or exact location. may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish. call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-8 OnStar
Vehicle and Power Issues Privacy

OnStar services require a vehicle The complete OnStar Privacy
electrical system, wireless service, Statement may be found at
and GPS satellite technologies to be www.onstar.com (U.S.),
available and operating for features or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
to function properly. These systems Privacy-sensitive users of wireless
may not operate if the battery is communications are cautioned that
discharged or disconnected. the privacy of any information sent
via wireless cellular communications
Add-on Electrical Equipment cannot be assured. Third parties
The OnStar system is integrated may unlawfully intercept or access
into the electrical architecture of the transmissions and private
vehicle. Do not add any electrical communications without consent.
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 945. Added
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
About Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . iii
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Accessories and
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-20 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Add-On Electrical
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Adding Equipment to the MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Audio System
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Adjustments
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Automatic
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Filter, Passenger
Alarm Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-23, 9-24 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Airbag System
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Automatic Transmission
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Shift Lock Control
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Auxiliary
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Check
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Stoplamps, and Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Ignition
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Child Restraints
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16 C Infants and Young
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Lower Anchors and
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Capacities and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-39
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Carbon Monoxide Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Cleaning
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Cargo Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 6-4
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Front Turn Signal and
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Cautions, Danger, and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-3
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Door

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Connections Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Customer Information Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Service Publications Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Customer Satisfaction Drive Systems
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-23, 9-24
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine Temperature D Driver Information
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Danger, Warnings, and Driving
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Characteristics and
Courtesy Transportation Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Daytime Running Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Cover Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Devices Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Diagnostics If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine F

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Filter,
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-4
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
E Coolant Temperature
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Fluid
Economy Mode Cooling System Messages . . .5-30
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Electrical Equipment, Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Fog Lamps
Electrical System Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 10-27, 6-4
Engine Compartment Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuses and Circuit Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21
Front Fog Lamp
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-20
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Instrument Panel Fuse Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Front Seats
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Emergency Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Filling a Portable Fuel
Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-35
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Warning Lights and High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
General Information Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Fuses
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Engine Compartment
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Heating and Air
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4
Fuses and Circuit
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 GM Mobility Reimbursement High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-44
Instrument Panel Fuse
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i-6 INDEX
I L Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-38
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
Antilock Brake System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Front Turn Signal and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17
Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Coolant
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
LATCH System
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
J Replacing Parts after a
Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
K Liftgate
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-32 Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-22
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Keyless Entry Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21
Lighting
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
StabiliTrak Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) M Mirrors

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Automatic Dimming
Maintenance
Traction Control System Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Maintenance Schedule
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-19 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Recommended Fluids
Locks Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Monitor System, Tire
Messages
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 N
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Navigation
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30
Low Washer Fluid Warning OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Lower Anchors and Tethers New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
for Children (LATCH
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 O
Object Detection System . . . . .5-32 Object Detection System
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Off-Road
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i-8 INDEX
Oil P Power (cont'd)

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Park
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-32 Power Steering Warning
Parking
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
OnStar Pregnancy, Using Safety
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Brake and P (Park)
OnStar Additional Privacy
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Radio Frequency
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-19
OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Program
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13
Passenger Compartment Air
OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 R
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-25
OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Radio Frequency
Personalization
Operation, Infotainment Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Phone
Ordering Radios
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16 Power AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Outlets Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Overview, Infotainment Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-33
Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-9
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Replacing Safety Belt S

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Reporting Safety Defects
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Recommended Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Fluids and U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Restraints
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Records Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Retained Accessory
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17
Recreational Vehicle Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Ride Control Systems
Safety Defects Reporting
Reduced Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Roads
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Reimbursement Program, Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Roadside Assistance
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Roof
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Seats
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Running the Vehicle While
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-31 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Replacing LATCH System
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
i-10 INDEX
Seats (cont'd) Shift Lock Control Function Storage Areas

Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Check, Automatic Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Cargo Management System . . . 4-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shifting Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Security Signals, Turn and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Spare Tire Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Specifications and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Accessories and Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 StabiliTrak Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 System
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance, General Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 T
Publications Ordering Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-19 Taillamps
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX i-11
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Tires (cont'd) Turn and Lane-Change

Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-55 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 When It Is Time for New Turn Signal
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing U
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-39 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-31
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Uniform Tire Quality
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-69 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-41
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Traction Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-27
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-45 Control System Warning
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 V
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Trailer Vehicle
Terminology and Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Uniform Tire Quality Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Identification
Wheel Alignment and Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Transportation Program, Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-35
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle (cont'd) Wheels

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Alignment and Tire
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 When It Is Time for New
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-37
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
W Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Warning Windshield
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Winter
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Wipers
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Washer Fluid, Low Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2013 Captiva

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Captiva

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/12/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2013 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Please refer to the purchase and Operating and specifically

In Brief Passenger Sensing System Rear Vision

9. Driver Information Center (DIC) 18. Traction Control System (TCS)

Initial Drive See Keys on page 21 and Remote

When the vehicle starts, the parking

Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

To raise or lower the front or rear

Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the control to the center Interior Mirrors

Power Outside Mirrors Hold the rearview mirror in the

To adjust the steering wheel:

Turn the control to the following

3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

3. Temperature Control 8. Rear Window Defogger

4. Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on

Vehicle Features For more information about these

Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls K : Press to reject an incoming

StabiliTrak System The TPMS does not replace normal

See Roadside Assistance Program

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors For vehicles with an automatic

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Windows Power Windows Press the front of the switch to open

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Window Lockout Roof 1. Open/Close: Slide and release

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Dirt and debris may collect on the

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

If available, move the lever up or

1. Lift the Ibar

3-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment